e 


a^  0-  'i^ 


-T^ 


HARVARD   UNIVERSITY 


A  BRIEF   STATEMENT   OF   WHAT   HARVARD   UNIVERSITY   IS, 

HOW   IT   MAY   BE   ENTERED   AND    HOW   ITS 

DEGREES   MAY   BE   OBTAINED. 


CAMBRIDGE,   MASS. 

PUBLISHED    BY    THE    UNIVERSITY. 

1891. 


^V.'L'(,^ 


<  ^((>OK('i 


HARVARD   UNIVERSITY, 


A  BRIEF   STATEMENT   OF   WHAT   HARVARD  UNIVERSITY  IS, 

HOW  IT   MAY  BE   ENTERED   AND   HOW  ITS 

DEGREES  MAY  BE  OBTAINED. 


By   frank   BOLLES, 

Secretary  of  Harvard  University. 


CAMBRIDGE,   MASS. 

PUBLISHED    BY    THE    UNIVERSITY. 

1891. 


PREFATORY    NOTE. 

This  descriptive  statement  is  designed  to  answer,  in  a  less  formal 
way  than  the  annual  Catalogue  answers  them,  many  of  the  questions 
which  the  intelligent  public  ask  concerning  Harvard  University  and 
its  wRjs  and  means. 

FRANK    BOLLES, 

Cambridge,  February,  189l. 


HARVARD    UNIVERSITY. 


A  BRIEF   STATEMENT  OF  WHAT  HARVARD   UNIVERSITY  IS,  HOW  IT  MAY 
BE   ENTERED,   AND   HOW  ITS   DEGREES   MAY   BE    OBTAINED. 


Harvard  College  is  the  oldest  of  American  institutions  of  learning, 
having  been  founded  in  1636.  What  is  now  known  as  Harvard  Uni- 
versit}^  includes  the  College,  the  Scientific  School,  the  Graduate  School, 
and  six  Professional  Schools. 

The  College,  Graduate  School,  and  the  Divinity,  Law,  and  Scien- 
tific Schools  are  situated  in  Cambridge,  Massachusetts,  a  city  of 
about  70,000  inhabitants.  The  Medical  School,  the  Dental  School, 
the  School  of  Veterinary  Medicine,  and  the  Bussey  Institution  (a 
school  of  Agriculture  and  Horticulture)  are  situated  in  Boston, 
a  city  of  nearly  450,000  inhabitants.  The  two  cities  are  connected 
by  steam,  electric,  and  horse  railways,  and  are  separated  by  the 
Charles  River.  The  distance  from  the  College  buildings  to  the  busi- 
ness centre  of  Boston  is  three  miles. 

The  University  is  governed  primarily  by  two  Boards,  the  Corpora- 
tion and  the  Overseers.  The  Corporation  (of  which  the  legal  title  is 
the  President  and  Fellows  of  Harvard  College)  consists  of  the  Presi- 
dent, Treasurer,  and  five  Fellows,  all  of  whom  hold  office  for  life. 
In  it  is  vested  the  title  to  the  property  of  the  University,  estimated 
to  be  w^orth  between  eleven  and  twelve  million  dollars.  The  Over- 
seers number  thirty-two,  including  the  President  and  Treasurer  of 
the  University,  who  are  ex  officio  members.  Five  of  the  Overseers 
go  out  of  office  each  year,  their  places  being  filled  on  Commencement 
Day  by  an  election  in  which  alumni  of  the  College  of  five  years  stand- 
ing. Masters  of  Arts,  and  holders  of  honorary  degrees  from  the 
University  are  entitled  to  vote  if  present  in  person. 

The  principal  administrative  officers  of  the  University  are  the 
President,  the  Treasurer,  the  Deans  of  the  various  Faculties,  Schools, 
and  Administrative  Boards,  the  Bursar,  and  the  Secretary.  The 
President  is  the  presiding  officer  of  the  Corporation  and  of  each 
of  the  Faculties,  and  he  exercises  a  general  superintendence  over 
all  the  manifold  concerns  of  the  institution.  The  Treasurer  is  the 
custodian  of  the  property  of  the  University,  makes  its  investments, 
and  keeps  its  financial  accounts.  The  Deans  conduct  the  business 
of  their  several  Faculties  or  Administrative  Boards.     The  Bursar  is 


the  Treasurer's  agent  in  dealing  with  students  in  renting  rooms, 
settling  term  bills,  and  similar  matters.  The  Secretary  conducts  the 
correspondence  of  the  University  and  keeps  certain  of  its  records. 

The  College,  Scientific  School,  and  Graduate  School  are  under 
the  control  of  the  Faculty  of  Arts  and  Sciences,  from  which  are  ap- 
pointed three  executive  committees,  called  Administrative  Boards, 
each  of  which  has  its  Dean,  and  by  which  the  College,  the  Scientific 
School,  and  the  Graduate  School  are  severally  governed. 

Each  Professional  School  has  a  separate  Faculty,  composed  of  all 
its  professors  and  other  teachers  holding  appointments  for  more  than 
one  year. 

The  degrees  conferred  by  the  various  departments  are  eleven  in 
number,  as  follows  :  — 

By  the  Faculty  of  Arts  and  Sciences  :  Bachelor  of  Arts,  Bachelor 
of  Science,  Master  of  Arts,  Doctor  of  Philosophy,  and  Doctor  of 
Science. 

By  the  Faculty  of  the  Divinity  School :    Bachelor  of  Divinity. 

By  the  Faculty  of  the  Law  School :  Bachelor  of  Laws. 

By  the  Faculty  of  the  Medical  School :  Doctor  of  Medicine. 

By  the  Faculty  of  the  Dental  School :    Doctor  of  Dental  Medicine. 

By  the  Faculty  of  the  Veterinary  School :  Doctor  of  Veterinary 
Medicine. 

By  the  Faculty  of  the  Bussey  Institution  :  Bachelor  of  Agricultural 
Science. 

The  degree  of  Master  of  Arts  is  given  with  the  professional  degree 
to  graduates  with  high  credit  of  the  Divinity,  Law,  and  Medical 
Schools  who  are  also  graduates  of  Harvard  College  or  whose  pre- 
vious training  has  been  recognized  by  the  Faculty  of  Arts  and 
Sciences  as  equivalent  to  that  of  a  Harvard  Bachelor  of  Arts. 

The  honorar}^  degrees  of  Master  of  Arts,  Doctor  of  Divinity,  and 
Doctor  of  Laws  are  occasionally  conferred  upon  eminent  persons 
selected  by  the  Corporation  and  approved  by  the  Overseers. 

The  roll  of  graduates  of  the  University  includes  the  names  of  over 
17,000  men. 

The  University  has  a  teaching  force  of  73  professors,  22  assistant 
professors,  and  147  other  instructors  of  various  grades,  making  242 
teachers  in  all. 

There  are  2271  students  in  the  University,  of  whom  the  College  has 
1339,  the  Medical  School  328,  the  Law  School  279,  the  Graduate 
School  125,  and  the  other  departments  the  remainder. 

The  libraries  of  the  University  contain  over  37G,000  bound  vol- 
umes and  an  approximately  equal  number  of  pamphlets.  Students 
are  charged  no  fees  for  the  use  of  books.     Ample  endowments  make 


it  possible  for  teachers  to  have  books  of  reference  needed  for  the 
instruction  of  their  classes  purchased  by  the  Library. 

In  addition  to  the  various  departments  already  named,  the  Univer- 
sity has  several  other  important  branches  which  will  be  described 
subsequently.  These  are  the  Astronomical  Observatory,  the  Univer- 
sity Museum,  including  the  Museum  of  Comparative  Zoology  and 
its  Natural  History  Laboratories,*  the  Botanical  and  Mineralogical 
Museums,  the  Peabod}^  Museum  of  American  Archaeology  and  Eth- 
nology, the  Semitic  Museum,  the  Anatomical  Museum,  the  Botanic 
Garden,  the  Herbarium,  the  Arnold  Arboretum,  the  Chemical  Labora- 
tory, the  Jefferson  Physical  Laboratory,  and  the  Veterinary  Hospital. 
The  Hemenwa}^  Gymnasium  is  for  the  use  of  the  whole  University. 
The  University  Chapel,  seating  900  persons,  is  controlled  by  the 
Preachers  to  the  University,  who  are  ordained  ministers  represent- 
ing different  Protestant  denominations.  The  Harvard  Dining  Asso- 
ciation, occupying  the  great  dining  hall  in  Memorial  Hall,  is  a 
voluntary  association  which  provides  over  750  officers  and  students 
with  a  good  quality  of  board  at  cost  price,  usually  about  $4  a  week. 
The  Harvard  Cooperative  Society  is  a  voluntary  association  of  officers 
and  students  which  supplies  members  of  the  University  with  books, 
stationers'  materials,  fancy  articles,  men's  furnishing  goods,  and  a 
great  variety  of  miscellaneous  articles.  Its  annual  sales  amount  to 
$68,000  The  Foxcroft  Club  is  a  third  association  of  a  cooperative 
character  composed  largely  of  students  living  at  home  or  at  a  distance 
from  the  College  buildings.  It  has  stud}^  rooms,  lunch  rooms,  a 
consulting  library,  and  other  conveniences  adapted  to  the  needs  of  non- 
resident students.  Meals  are  supplied  at  cost  by  the  card,  and  the 
average  expenditure  per  man  is  less  than  three  dollars  a  week. 
These  three  associations  are  managed  by  boards  of  directors  chosen 
by  ballot  from  among  the  officers  and  students  of  the  various  depart- 
ments of  the  University. 

The  University  owns  in  Cambridge  twelve  dormitories  or  halls. 
These  have  accommodations  for  973  students,  provided  all  double 
rooms  are  occupied  by  two  persons.  As  a  matter  of  fact  the  number 
of  double  rooms  held  by  students  preferring  to  lodge  alone  is  large. 
Rents  range  from  $25  to  $350  a  year.  Full  information  regarding 
prices  and  the  methods  of  securing  rooms  can  be  obtained  from 
the  Bursar.  There  are  a  number  of  large  private  dormitories  ad- 
joining the  College  grounds,  and  students  are  received  as  lodgers 
or  boarders  in  many  private  houses  in  various  parts  of  Cambridge, 
Boston,  and  suburban  towns.  Furnished  rooms,  suitable  for  either 
one  or  two  persons,  are  obtainable  at  a  distance  from  the  College 
Yard  at  low  rents,  as  for  example  from  $35  to  $75  a  year.      Good 


6 

order  is  mainttiined  in  College  and  private  dormitories  by  graduates 
or  instructors  holding  appointments  as  Proctors.  Proctors  are 
under  the  direction  of  the  Chairman  of  the  Parietal  Committee. 
At  his  discretion  a  Proctor  may  be  placed  in  any  private  house 
where  students  lodge,  if  the  maintainance  of  good  order  in  the  house 
seems  to  require  it. 

The  athletic  sports  of  the  University  are  regulated  by  a  com- 
mission, composed  of  three  graduates,  three  professors,  and  three 
students,  which  acts  independently  of  any  Faculty.  The  sports 
include  rowing,  canoeing,  base-ball,  foot-ball,  lacrosse,  lawn-tennis, 
cricket,  polo,  rifle-shooting,  hare  and  hounds  races  ;  track  athletics, 
including  bicycle  racing,  running  and  jumping ;  and  gymnasium 
exercises  of  various  kinds,  which  are  under  the  general  supervision 
of  Dudley  A.  Sargent,  M.D.,  the  Director  of  the  Gymnasium. 
The  athletic  facilities  of  the  University  are  excellent.  The  Charles 
River  with  its  miles  of  broad  surface  is  only  a  few  minutes'  walk 
from  the  College.  The  University  Boat  Houses  are  conveniently 
located  on  its  nearer  bank.  The  foot-ball,  base-ball,  tennis,  and 
other  fields  are  in  the  immediate  vicinity  of  the  Gymnasium,  the  Fives 
Courts,  and  the  Rowing  Tank.  The  country  roads  around  Cambridge 
are  well  made,  inviting  horseback  and  bicycle  riding,  driving,  and 
walking.  Skating  and  tobogganing  are  popular  sports  in  their  sea- 
son, which  lasts  in  ordinary  years  from  December  to  March.  The 
principal  athletic  events  of  the  year  are  the  championship  foot-ball 
games  in  the  autumn,  the  in-door  Gymnasium  contests  in  the  winter, 
the  championship  base-ball  games  in  the  spring,  and  the  annual  boat 
races  at  New  London  in  the  early  summer.  Only  students  whose 
conduct  and  standing  in  College  and  whose  physical  condition  are 
satisfactory  are  allowed  to  take  part  in  public  athletic  contests  or 
similar  exhibitions.  The  money  accounts  of  the  various  athletic 
organizations  are  under  the  dh-ection  of  a  graduate  treasurer  ap- 
pointed by  the  Athletic  Commission. 

The  University  contains  a  great  number  of  literary,  dramatic, 
religious,  scientific,  musical,  and  social  societies.  Among  the  most 
prominent  are  the  Union,  where  social  and  political  questions  of 
national  interest  are  debated  ;  the  Hasty  Pudding  Club,  founded  in 
1795,  which  has  a  large  club-house  and  theatre  ;  the  Harvard  branch 
of  the  Y.  M.  C.  A.  ;  the  Total  Abstinence  League  ;  the  Deutscher 
Verein  and  Conference  Fran9aise  ;  the  Glee  Club  and  Pierian  Sodal- 
ity ;  and  numerous  Greek  letter  societies,  including  the  Phi  Beta 
Kappa  and  Alpha  Delta  Phi.  Li  the  Law  School  are  several  clubs 
which  conduct  Moot  Courts  at  stated  periods.  The  other  Professional 
Schools  have  analogous  societies  which  form  useful  adjuncts  to  class- 
room work. 


The  University  itself  publishes  an  annual  Catalogue  (price  60c.)  ; 
the  annual  report  of  the  President  and  Treasurer ;  the  Quarterly 
Journal  of  Economics  ;  the  Historical  Monographs  ;  Studies  in  Classi- 
cal Philology  ;  the  Library  Bulletin  ;  the  Weekly?  Calendar  ;  and  vari- 
ous pamphlets  for  general  distributon.  Students  publish  the  annual 
Index,  with  records  of  sports  and  societies ;  the  Law  Review  ;  the 
Advocate  (bi-weekly)  ;  the  Lampoon  (an  illustrated  fortnightly)  ; 
the  Harvard  Monthly  ;  and  the  Daily  Crimson.  The  experience  ob- 
tained on  these  papers,  especially  the  last-named,  enables  some  of 
their  editors  to  make  successful  beginnings  in  journalism  as  soon  as 
they  leave  College,  and  to  earn  money  during  their  College  course  by 
serving  as  correspondents  for  some  of  the  city  journals.  Students 
can  earn  money  while  in  Cambridge  by  private  tutoring ;  singing  in 
the  College  Choir  and  in  the  choirs  of  the  neighboring  churches  ; 
doing  clerical  or  stenographic  work  ;  and  type-writing.  Active,  ener- 
getic students,  while  able  to  live  as  cheaply  in  Cambridge  as  at 
colleges  in  rural  districts,  find  not  only  that  there  are  more  ways  of 
earning  money,  but  that  more  is  paid  them  for  the  same  services.  As 
is  shown  by  the  accompanying  table,  the  University  distributes  over 
$79,000  a  year  in  scholarships,  beneficiary  funds,  and  prizes. 

Income    op   Funds    and    other    Sums    annually    available    in    Harvard 
University,    as    money-aids    to    Students. 

Graduate  School.     Eellowsliips $12,200  * 

"  "  Scholarships 7,750 

Prizes 1,225  f 

Harvard  College.     Scholarships 21,495 

"               "          Beneficiary  Funds 17,600- 

"               "          Loan  Funds 3,248 

"          Prizes 1,055 

Lawrence  Scientific 

School.             Scholarships 1,800 

Divinity  School.  Scholarships      1,385 

"               "  Beneficiary  Funds 685 

"               "  Hopkins  Fund 2,100 

"               "  Williams  Fund      .    .    .   • 4,000 

"               "  Williams  Fellowship 1,000 

Law  School.  Scholarships      1,500 

<'  Prizes 100 

Foster  Fund 150  J 

Medical  School.        Scholarships 1,500 

Foster  Fund [150]  J 

**  "  Prizes 375 

$79,168 

*  Including  the  Hemenway  and  Visiting  Committee  fellowships  in  American 
Archaeology. 

t  Many  prizes  open  to  graduate  students  are  also  open  to  students  in  other 
departments. 

X  The  income  of  the  Foster  Fund  is  available  in  the  Law  and  Medical  Schools 
in  alternate  years. 


8 

The  annual  outlay  of  an  economical  student  who  comes  to  Cam- 
bridge with  a  good  supply  of  clothing  and  bed  linen  is  necessarily 
nearly  $400.  For  tuition  he  must  pay  $150  (except  in  the  Divinity 
School,  where  the  fee  is  $50  ;  and  in  the  Medical  Sch^ool,  where  it  is 
$200).  A  room  furnished,  lighted,  and  warmed  cannot  well  cost 
less  than  $35,  even  if  it  is  small  and  inconveniently  located.  Books, 
stationery,  and  laboratory  fees  amount  to  about  $20  a  year ;  and 
washing  to  at  least  $15.  Wholesome  food  can  be  procured  for  about 
$2.75  a  week,  although  a  few  students  live  for  a  little  less.  Sundries 
may  reach  $40  for  the  year,  especially  if  by  living  at  a  distance,  the 
student  spends  a  good  deal  in  'car  fares.  Allowing  nothing  for 
clothing,  these  estimates  would  make  the  expenses  of  the  first  year  in 
College  $367.  After  that  they  tend  to  grow  larger.  Students  who 
are  not  forced  to  practice  strict  economy  of  course  spend  more  than 
the  syms  named.  Perhaps  a  quarter  of  each  college  class  live  on 
less  than  $600  a  year,  clothes  included.  Another  quarter  spend  be- 
tween $600  and  $800.  Every  dollar  over  $1200  which  even  the 
richest  student  spends  is,  as  a  wise  writer  on  this  point  has  said, 
"  a  dollar  of  danger."  The  same  writer  has  said  as  to  the  advisa- 
bility of  encouraging  poor  men  to  come  to  Harvard  :  — 

' '  Whenever  you  encounter  a  poor  boy  of  eager,  aggressive 
mind,  a  youth  of  energy,  one  capable  of  feeling  the  enjoyment  of 
struggling  with  a  multitude,  of  making  his  merit  known,  say  to 
him  that  Harvard  College  is  expressly  constituted  for  such  as 
he.  Here  he  will  find  the  largest  provision  for  his  needs  and  the 
clearest  field  for  his  talents.  Money  is  a  power  everywhere.  It 
is  a  power  here  ;  but  a  power  of  far  more  restricted  scope  than  in 
the  world  at  large.  In  this  magnificent  hall  (Memorial  Hall)  rich 
and  poor  dine  together  daily.  At  the  Union  they  debate  together. 
At  the  clubs  which  foster  special  interests,  —  the  Finance  Club, 
the  Philological  Club,  the  Philosophical  Club,  the  French  Club,  the 
Signet,  and  the  O.  K.,  —  considerations  of  money  have  no  place. 
If  the  poor  man  is  a  man  of  muscle,  the  athletic  organizations  will 
welcome  him  ;  if  a  man  skilled  in  words,  he  will  be  made  an  editor 
of  the  college  papers  ;  and  if  he  has  the  powers  that  fit  him  for  the 
place,  the  whole  body  of  his  class-mates  will  elect  him  Orator,  Ivy 
Orator,  Odist,  or  Poet,  without  the  slightest  regard  to  whether  his 
purse  is  full  or  empty." 

Since  this  was  written  its  truth  has  been  strikingly  exemplified  by 
the  election  to  the  class  oratorship  of  a  man  who  had  not  only  worked 
his  way  into  and  through  College,  but  who  was  of  unmixed  negro 
blood. 

The  following  letter  tells  the  story  of  a  white  undergraduate  who 


came  recently  from  a  Southern  State,  without  a  friend  in  Cambridge, 
made  his  way  on  the  slenderest  possible  income,  and  graduated  with 
distinction. 

Harvard  College,  April  19,  1889. 
In  reply  to  your  question  I  would  state  that  my  expenses  for  the  past 
two  college  years  have  been  as  follows.     I  record  only  the  necessary 

expenses. 

For  1887-88. 

Boom  rent,  fuel,  etc $40.00 

Board,  private,  15  weeks 52.50 

"       at  Memorial  24  weeks 99.00 

Clothing,  including  washing    . 60.00 

Books  and  stationery 15.00 

Tuition 150.00 

Laboratory  fees 25.00 

441.50 

Deduct  for  Laboratory     . 25.00 

$416.50 
For  1888-89. 

Room  rent,  fuel,  and  lights f  40.00 

Board,  private 140.00 

Clothing  and  washing 40.00 

Books  and  stationery 10.00 

Tuition 150.00 

Laboratory  fees      55.00 

435.00 

Deduct  for  Laboratory 55.00 

$380.00 

I  will  state  that  I  entered  Harvard  with  but  two  hundred  dollars  a  year 

to  pay  my  expenses  with,  which  is  less  money  than  I  spent  at  the  

College.     The  above  is  not  an  under-estimate  of  what  I  have  actually 

spent  for  the  items  named,  but  so  far  as  I  am  able  to  give,  the  exact 
figures.    With  the  assistance  I  can  get  here,  I  am  enabled  to  live  better 

and  cheaper  than  at  the College.     I  am  satisfied  that  any  good 

student  from  the  South  can,  with  the  assistance  offered  at  Harvard,  live 
with  as  little  cost  to  himself  as  he  can  at  the  Southern  colleges. 

I  am  yours  truly,  . 

If  a  student  in  regular  standing  passes  successfully  through  his 
first  year  at  Harvard  and  proves  himself  to  be  upright  in  character, 
strong  in  body,  and  of  unmistakable  promise  intellectually,  there  is 
little  chance  of  his  being  compelled  to  leave  College  on  account  of 
lack  of  money.  When  his  course  is  finished  he  finds  no  great  diffi- 
culty in  obtaining  a  foothold  in  the  outside  world.  A  highly-recom- 
mended graduate  of  the  College,  or  of  any  of  the  Professional 
Schools,  as  a  rule  finds  himself  given  a  fair  chance  to  choose  the 


10 

part  of  the  country  in  which  he  will  accept  an  offer  to  enter  upon  his 
life  work.  The  demand  for  Harvard  Graduates  as  teachers  in  both 
schools  and  colleges  is  in  excess  of  the  number  of  persons  who  can 
be  cordially  recommended  by  the  University  authorities.  The  same 
is  true  in  various  degrees  of  the  demand  for  young  men  to  enter  the 
railway  service,  journalism,  the  publishing  business,  and  other  walks 
of  life  where  a  college  training  is  of  practical  advantage.  Every 
effort  is  made  by  the  University  to  satisfy  applications  for  the  ser- 
vices of  graduates,  and  eVery  student  of  merit  is  encouraged  to  ask 
aid  in  securing  the  employment  which  he  desires. 


11 


HARVARD   COLLEGE. 

The  matters  considered  thus  far  concern  the  University  as  a  whole. 
There  are  others  which  relate  to  the  several  departments.  Of  these 
departments  the  College  is  the  oldest  and  largest.  It  has  a  high 
standard  for  its  degree  of  Bachelor  of  Arts.  Few,  if  any,  other 
American  colleges  equal  it  in  this  particular.  This  fact  is  shown  by 
the  requirements  for  admission  and  graduation,  as  stated  m  the 
University  Catalogue,  and  exemplified  by  the  examination  papers  on 
admission  requirements  and  on  college  studies.  A  large  number  of 
high  schools  and  academies  are  quite  unable  to  fit  their  pupils  for 
Harvard  College  ;  and  many  of  the  best  preparatory  schools  provide 
extra  instruction  for  pupils  intending  to  enter  here.  Finally,  stu- 
dents coming  to  Harvard  from  another  college  seldom  find  it  for  their 
interest  to  enter  at  the  same  grade  which  they  held  at  the  college 
from  which  they  came.  Entrance  ad  eundem  can,  however,  always 
be  obtained  by  passing  the  required  examinations,  and  it  is  sometimes 
granted  without  examination  to  students  who  have  gone  temporarily 
to  another  college  and  have  maintained  there  a  specially  high  rank. 

Although  the  Harvard  standard  is  thus  seen  to  be  exceptionally 
high,  the  requirements  for  admission  are  much  more  elastic  than 
those  which  prevail  in  most  other  places.  The  simplest  form  of  the 
requirements  calls  for  a  specified  knowledge  of  English,  Greek, 
Latin,  German,  French,  history,  algebra,  plane  geometry  and  phys- 
ics, together  with  advanced  preparation  in  two  subjects  chosen  from 
the  languages  already  named,  mathematics,  and  physical  science. 
But  if  a  candidate  prefers  to  omit  either  Greek  or  Latin,  and  either 
French  or  German,  he  may  do  so  on  condition  of  passing  (under 
certain  restrictions^  in  the  case  of  Greek  or  Latin)  in  an  additional 
number  of  advanced  subjects.  Moreover  in  history  he  has  a  choice 
between  American  and  English  history  and  the  history  of  Greece  and 
Rome  ;  and  in  physical  science  between  elementary  physics  and  as- 
tronomy learned  from  text-books  only,  and  experimental  physics 
learned  in  the  laboratory.  In  elementary  Greek,  Latin,  German, 
and  French  he  is  not  tied  to  any  particular  authors,  but  is  asked  to 
show  his  ability  to  translate  simple  prose  passages  at  sight.  In 
English  he  is  required  to  write  a  composition  upon  a  subject  taken 
from  one  of  several  specified  books,  most  of  which  —  if  he  has 
literary  taste  —  he  has  probably  read  before  being  required  to  do  so. 
For  an  exact  statement  of  the  existing  requirements  for  admission 


12 

the  candidate  should  invariably  consult  the  University  Catalogue, 
but  the  following  details  ma}^  serve  to  give  an  idea  of  what  a  Harvard 
student  is  expected  to  learn  before  entering  College. 

Elementary  Studies. 

English.  —  The  first  part  of  the  examination  in  English  is  based 
upon  selected  works  of  standard  English  authors.  The  list  of  books 
changes  from  year  to  year,  the  announcement  of  the  changes  being 
published  several  years  in  advance.  The  student  should  read  the  pre- 
scribed books  as  he  reads  other  books ;  he  will  be  expected,  not  to 
know  them  minutely,  but  to  have  freshly  in  mind  their  most  important 
parts.  He  may  be  asked  to  write  an  outline  of  a  specified  novel  or  to 
explain  the  purport  of  an  essay. 

Whatever  the  subject  of  the  composition,  the  examiner  will  regard 
knowledge  of  the  book  as  far  less  important  than  ability  to  write 
English.  The  student  should  therefore  have  constant  practice  in 
writing,  and  should  test  his  work  severely.  He  should  spell  correctly 
and  punctuate  intelligently.  He  should  make  sure  —  so  far  as  he 
can  —  that  every  word  means  something,  and  the  right  thing;  that 
every  sentence  is  grammatical ;  and  that  thought  follows  thought  in 
logical  order.  He  should  do  his  best  to  make  his  work  accurate  in 
every  part,  and  to  combine  the  parts  in  a  coherent  whole. 

The  student  may  train  himself  for  the  correction  of  specimens  of 
bad  English  —  the  second  part  of  the  examination  —  (a)  by  correcting 
his  own  work ;  (6)  by  correcting  the  specimens  of  bad  English  in 
some  elementary  text-book.  * 

In  preparation  for  both  parts  of  the  examination,  he  should  study 
the  elements  of  grammar  and  rhetoric ;  and  should  apply  what  he 
learns  (a)  to  his  own  writing ;  (5)  to  specimen  pages  of  the  pre- 
scribed books. 

Greek.  —  The  examination  in  Elementary  G-reek  tests  the  candi- 
date's ability  to  translate  simple  Attic  prose  at  sight.  In  order  to 
meet  this  requirement  the  candidate  must  possess  a  good  practical 
knowledge  of  the  forms  and  constructions  of  the  language  and  must 
have  command  of  a  considerable  vocabularj^  The  essential  forms 
and  ordinary  constructions  should  be  thoroughly  mastered.  From 
the  beginning,  practical  use  should  be  made  of  the  knowledge  ac- 
quired by  translating  Greek  into  English  and  English  into  Greek, 
first  single  detached  sentences  and  then,  as  soon  as  possible,  con- 
nected passages.     The  acquisition  of  a  vocabulary  should  be  system- 

*  Such,  for  example,  as  Exercises  in  English  by  II.  I.  Strang.  Boston  :  1).  C. 
Heath  &  Co.     • 


13 

atically  pursued.  Important  words  should  be  daily  committed  to 
memory,  not  as  separate  units,  but  with  regard  to  their  affinity  in 
form  and  meaning.  These  groups  of  related  words  will  grow  from 
lesson  to  lesson.  In  acquiring  the  elements  of  the  language  some 
such  help  should  be  resorted  to  as  The  Beginner's  Greek  Book,  pub- 
lished by  Ginn  &  Company,  Boston,  which  supplies  materials  and 
indicates  the  method. 

When  the  elements  have  been  acquired,  the  pupil  should  read  ex- 
tensively in  Xenophon,  the  most  of  whose  writings  are  accessible  in 
good  school  editions.  He  should  be  required  to  read  aloud,  and 
should  be  taught  to  depend,  in  readiug,  upon  his  own  resources  so  far 
as  possible.  He  should  commit  the  new  words  that  he  meets  to 
memory,  and  should  confirm  his  knowledge  of  forms  and  construc- 
tions by  systematic  use  of  a  grammar.  He  should  aim  to  learn  to 
read  freely  and  with  ease,  but  always  exactly.  The  total  amount 
read  in  preparation  for  the  examination  should  not  be  less  than  three 
hundred  or  four  hundred  pages. 

Latin.  —  The  examination  in  Elementary  Latin  demands  of  the 
candidate  ability  to  read  simple  prose  which  he  has  not  read  before. 
This  is  the  main  requirement ;  but  to  enforce  thoroughness  and  ex- 
actness in  the  candidate's  training,  questions  on  the  ordinary  forms 
and  constructions  of  the  language  are  appended  to  the  passages  set 
for  translation.  Thorough  preparation  for  this  examination  requires, 
for  the  average  student,  a  three-years  course,  and  this  is  the  time 
usually  given  to  it;  some  of  the  best  schools  give  even  more.  The 
student's  training  should  be  of  the  same  general  character  as  that 
recommended  in  Greek.  The  author  most  commonly  read  is  Caesar ; 
but  others,  such  as  Nepos  and  Quintus  Curtius,  may  be  used  advan- 
tageously for  supplementary  reading.  Pupils  from  the  best  schools 
have  also  usually  read  selections  from  Ovid  or  a  few  books  of  the 
Aeneid  by  the  time  they  take  the  elementary  examinations,  although 
ability  to  read  these  authors  is  not  required. 

German. — A  student  who  wishes  to  fit  himself  to  pass  the  ele- 
mentary examination  in  German  for  admission  to  Harvard  College 
should  first  master  so  much  of  the  grammar  as  is  contained  in  Shel- 
don's "  Short  Grammar."  He  is  advised  to  give  especial  attention 
from  the  beginning  to  the  rules  for  pronunciation.  The  study  of  the 
Grammar  should  be  accompanied  by  the  careful  reading  of  at  least 
two  hundred  duodecimo  pages  of  easy  German  ;  such  as  Grimm's 
Fairy  Tales,  or  the  easier  stories  of  Heyse,  Storm,  and  Zschokke. 
There  are  several  German  readers  which  have  good  selections  for 
beginners.     Among   others   may  be   mentioned :    Grauert's   Reader 


14 

(E.  Steiger,  New  York),  Joynes'  Reader  (D.  C.  Heath  &  Co.,  Bos- 
ton), Whitney's  Reader  (Henry  Holt  &  Co.,  New  York).  The  stu- 
dent is  advised  to  give  himself  a  good  deal  of  practice  in  reading  "  at 
sight"  ;  that  is  to  say,  as  soon  as  he  has  mastered  a  small  vocabu- 
lary he  should  tr}^  to  make  out,  without  too  constant  use  of  the  dic- 
tionary, the  meaning  of  easy  sentences  which  are  new  to  him.  A 
good  book  for  practice  in  reading  at  sight  is  Leander's  Traumereien 
(D.  C.  Heath  &  Co.,  Boston). 

The  one  point  in  grammatical  study  which  will  best  help  the  stu- 
dent to  read  at  sight  is  a  thorough  mastery  of  all  the  irregular  (or 
"  strong  ")  verbs. 

French. — To  prepare  for  the  elementary  examination  in  French, 
the  student  should  use  such  books  as  Chardenal's  first  and  second 
French  courses  and  (in  case  he  is  working  without  the  aid  of  a  com- 
petent teacher)  the  ke3^s  to  the  exercises  of  the  same.  A  student 
working  without  a  teacher  should  write  the  exercises,  then  correct 
them  with  the  help  of  the  key,  and  write  them  over  again  a  few  days 
later  without  looking  at  the  first  draft.  Not  less  than  five  hundred 
pages  of  French  should  be  read.  The  best  books  to  begin  with  are 
readers,  such  as  Bdcher's  French  Reader,  or  Macmillan's  Second  Pro- 
gressive French  Reader ;  then  easy  novels  and  plays,  such  as  I'Abbe 
Constantin,  b}^  Ludovic  Halevy ;  la  Poudre  aux  Y^eux,  and  le  Voj'age 
de  M.  Perrichon,  by  Labiche.  Excellent,  as  well  as  easy,  historical 
reading  will  be  provided  by  the  Charles  XII.  of  Voltaire.  It  is 
essential  that  some  idea  of  the  pronunciation  should  be  obtained 
from  some  one  fairly  conversant  with  the  French  language.  Gose's 
Fi'ench-English  and  English-French  Dictionary  will  be  found  at  least 
as  convenient  as  any. 

History. — The  requirement  in  history  is  intended  to  call  for  a 
substantial  piece  of  work,  equal  to  that  demanded  in  any  other  sub- 
ject occupying  one  hour  on  the  examination  programme.  The  books 
named  in  the  Catalogue  to  "indicate  the  amount  of  knowledoe 
demanded ' '  represent  the  minimum  of  fact  which  a  candidate  is 
expected  to  master.  The  preparation  should  be  such  as  to  enable 
the  pupil  to  use  his  facts.  The  "  additional  readings  "  are  therefore 
particularly  recommended,  showing  how  to  reason  from  facts,  and 
the  larger  the  amount  of  reading  which  is  thoughtfully  done,  the 
greater  will  be  the  number  of  things  which  the  pupil  remembers 
because  he  is  interested  in  them.  The  best  method  of  instruction  is 
to  use  a  text-book  as  a  guide,  and  to  require  pupils  from  da}^  to  da}^ 
to  read  the  ''additional  readings"  and  like  works  giving  other 
accounts  of  the  same  events  or  institutions.     Care  should  be  taken 


15 

that  pupils  should  remember  the  ideas  of  the  books,  but  state  them 
in  their  own  words.  Much  may  be  accomplished  by  distributing- 
topics  among  the  members  of  the  class  for  special  preparation,  the 
best  of  them  to  be  reported  to  the  class.  In  such  cases  the  teacher 
should  take  care  that  every  pupil  masters  also  the  general  lesson. 
The  teacher  will  find  it  useful  to  his  pupils  frequently  to  set  them  ques- 
tions, so  put  as  to  make  each  one  think  about  and  combine  for  him- 
self the  facts  with  which  he  is  dealing.  Answers  should  be  written. 
Candidates  studying  by  themselves  should  read  text-books  and  addi- 
tional readings  carefully,  reviewing  at  times  by  taking  up  such  com- 
pendiums  as  Ploetz's  Epitome,  and  trying  to  bring  together  from 
memory  the  causes  and  results  of  events  mentioned.  The  geography 
ma}^  be  best  learned  by  the  use  of  outline  maps,  boundaries  being 
drawn  and  places  located  from  memory. 

Mathematics.  — A  thorough,  practical  acquaintance  with  ordinary 
arithmetic  is  assumed  as  underlying  all  preparation  in  Mathematics. 
But  no  examination  is  held  in  arithmetic ;  and  students  are  advised 
not  to  waste  their  time  on  merely  puzzling  problems,  which  can  be 
better  solved  by  algebra,  or  on  the  details  of  commercial  arithmetic. 
The  "four  rules,"  the  operations  on  vulgar  and  decimal  fractions, 
the  simpler  reductions  and  combinations  of  compound  numbers,  and 
the  extraction  of  the  square  root  ought,  however,  to  be  thoroughly 
understood,  in  such  a  manner  as  to  be  easily  and  accurately  worked 
out ;  for  these  afford  the  necessary  basis  of  mathematical  knowledge. 

The  examinations  in  elementarj^  algebra  and  plane  geometry  re- 
quire not  only  accurate  knowledge  of  those  subjects,  but  the  practical 
power  —  which  can  easily  be  gained  by  training  —  to  use  that  knowl- 
edge in  the  solution  of  new  problems  and  examples.  Memory  is  in- 
dispensable here  as  elsewhere  ;  but  in  Mathematics,  its  part  should 
be  as  small  as  possible.  The  student  should  strive  to  attain  a 
firm  hold  of  the  reasons  involved  in  the  demonstrations,  solutions, 
constructions,  rules,  and  methods  presented  to  him  ;  to  remember 
those  reasons  through  the  force  with  which  they  are  impressed  on 
his  mind  ;  and  to  remember  the  details  of  his  subject,  because  he 
remembers  their  reasons.  This  requires  earnest,  patient,  concen- 
trated study ;  but  the  habit  once  formed,  Mathematics  becomes 
easy,  and  the  student  can  enter  a  mathematical  examination  with 
confidence. 

The  list  of  subjects  in  algebra,  given  in  the  Announcement  of 
Eequirements,  should  be  carefully  considered ;  and  the  student 
should  not  fail  to  covei"  the  whole  ground  there  specified.  A  large 
number  of  examples   should   be   solved  ;    so   that   the    student  may 


.  1^ 

learn  to  do  his  work  with  reasonable  quickness,  as  well  as  with  clear- 
ness, facility,  and  exactness.  The  examination  aims  to  test  all  these 
qualities.  The  solution  of  tolerably  complicated  literal  quadratics  ; 
the  various  methods  of  elimination,  for  equations  of  the  first  two 
degrees  ;  the  putting  of  problems,  in  a  neat  manner,  into  equations ; 
the  working  of  all  the  algebraic  operations  both  for  integral  and  for 
fractional  expressions  :  —  may  be  specially  pointed  out  as  important 
subjects  of  attention.  The  student  should  learn  to  arrange  his  work 
in  a  clear,  orderly,  and  compact  fashion.  Wentworth's  Elementary 
Algebra  (Ginn  &  Co.,  Boston)  is  widely  and  successfully  used  by 
schools  which  prepare  for  this  College.  But  any  reputable  text-book, 
if  it  is  well  provided  with  examples  and  covers  the  whole  ground 
required,  may  be  employed.  Wentworth's  College  Algebra  (same 
publishers).  Chaps.  X.  and  XI.  ;  Todhunter's  Algebra  (Macmillan  & 
Co.,  New  York),  Chaps.  VL-VIIL,  XIII.,  XVIII. ,  XIX.,  XXI.- 
XXIV.,  inclusive;  and  Wentworth  and  Hill's  Exercise  and  Exam- 
ination Manuals  (Ginn  &  Co.)  contain  good  examples  for^practice. 

In  Geometry,  the  student  should  guard  against  committing  his 
demonstrations  and  solutions  to  memory  from  his  text-book.  He 
should,  so  far  as  possible,  work  them  out. for  himself,  with  his  own 
diagrams,  using  the  book  as  a  guide,  and  alwaj^s  bearing  in  mind 
that  his  object  is  to  learn  a  subject,  not  a  particular  author's  present- 
ation of  that  subject.  He  should  make  his  diagrams  as  different  from 
those  drawn  in  his  book  as  the  conditions  of  the  question  allow ;  he 
should  often  use '  different  lettering  from  the  book ;  and  sometimes 
try  to  invent  proofs  and  solutions  of  his  own,  remembering  alwa3's 
that  the  shortest  and  simplest  methods,  if  rigorous,  are  best.  This 
way  of  working  will  help  him  towards  the  solution  of  original  prob- 
lems, on  which  he  should  carefully  prepare  himself.  It  is  an  excel- 
lent practice  to  pierform  many  actual  constructions  with  the  rule  and 
compasses,  according  to  geometric  principles,  and  with  the  utmost 
care  and  finish.  The  student  thus  becomes  familiar  with  the  condi- 
tions of  the  possibility  of  a  construction  and  with  the  actual  use  of 
theorems ;  and  acquires  a  greater  interest  in  his  study.  But  he 
should  remember  that  a  fine  drawing,  however  useful  in  its  own  way, 
has  no  geometric  value  ;  it  is  unnecessary  to  a  sound  demonstration 
and  is  powerless  to  redeem  a  faulty  one.  Byerl3''s  Chauvenet's 
Geometry  (Lippincott  Co.,  Philadelphia)  is  to  be  strongly  recom- 
mended as  a  suitable  text-book  ;  Wentworth's  Geometry  (Ginn  & 
Co.,  Boston)  may  also  be  favorably  mentioned  ;  but,  as  in  algebra, 
any  standard  treatise  may  be  chosen.  In  addition  to  the  regular 
text-books,  Julius  Petersen's  "Methods  and  Theories  for  the  Solu- 
tion of  Problems  etc."  (Sampson  Low  &  Co.,  London)  may  be  used 


17 

with  advantage  by  the  student  who  has  the  time  and  inclination  to 
make  special  studies  in  the  art  of  geometric  invention. 

One  third  of  one  full  year  of  work  may  be  taken  to  represent  the 
time  devoted  to  the  study  of  elementary  algebra  at  good  schools  ; 
and  one  fifth  of  a  year,  the  time  devoted  to  plane  geometr3^  A 
capable  and  somewhat  mature  student  may  prepare  himself  satisfac- 
torily for  the  examinations  in  decidedly  less  time  ;  but,  on  the  other 
hand,  the  student  who  can  give  more  study  to  plane  geometry  espe- 
cially is  strongly  advised  to  do  so.  A  thorough  master}^  of  either  of 
these  subjects,  on  which  all  higher  study  of  Mathematics  depends, 
and  which  contribute  indirectly  in  an  important  degree  to  a  vigorous 
mental  training,  necessarily  requires  time  for  the  assimilation  of  the 
new  conceptions  and  processes  which  characterize  them,  and  for  the 
formation  of  habits  of  exact  thought. 

Elementary  Physics. — Previous  to  1886  the  only  requirement  in 
physics  foi*  admission  to  Harvard  College  was  text-book  work.  In 
that  year  and  the  year  following  a  pamphlet  was  prepared  by  the 
College  describing  in  detail  a  laboratory  course  intended  as  an  alter- 
native for  the  text-book  course.  A  candidate  for  admission  may 
therefore  now  offer  either  a  text-book  course  or  a  laboratory  course. 
The  laboratory  course  is  strongly  recommended  to  all  who  can  take  it. 

The  text-book  alternative  is  retained  because  the  teaching  of  phys- 
ics by  laboratory  methods  has  not  yet  become  general  in  the  schools 
of  "the  country  at  large.  Concerning  this  requirement  nothing  need 
be  added  to  the  statement  of  the  College  Catalogue,  which  is  as  fol- 
lows :  Astronomy  (Lockyer's  Elementary  Lessons)  and  Physics 
(Avery's  Elements  of  Natural  Philosophy*  or  Gage's  Elements  of 
Physics) .  This  requirement,  if  fully  and  thoroughly  met,  probably 
imposes  as  much  work  upon  the  student  as  the  laboratory-  alternative. 

Inquiry  has  shown  that  in  a  considerable  number  of  the  best  schools 
which  fit  for  Harvard  College  about  five  school-hours  per  week,  pre- 
sumably with  some  hours  each  week  out  of  school,  for  one  year  were 
devoted  to  physics.  Accordingly,  the  laboratory  course  described  in 
the  pamphlet  was  planned  to  occupy  the  student,  in  school  and  out, 
about  seven  or  eight  hours  per  week  for  one  year. 

As  physics  is  no  longer  a  required  study  in  college,  it  was  borne 
in  mind,  in  planning  the  laboratory  course  for  the  schools,  that  very 
many  of  those  taking  it  would  never  have  any  other  systematic  course 
in  physics.     Accordingly  the  exercises  were  so  chosen  as  to  cover  a 

*  The  following  portions  of  the  1885  edition  may  be  omitted  :  —  sections  I.  and 
II.  of  chap.  I.  (excepting  arts.  23-30),  arts.  254-267,  346-349,  371,  411-415, 
445-455,  464-467,  470-476,  707-714,  729-745,  and  the  whole  Appendix. 


18 

wide  range  of  subjects  and  to  have  many  applications  in  the  experi- 
ence of  every-day  life.  The  course  at  its  last  revision,  in  1889,  was 
arranged  in  forty-six  exercises,  any  six  of  which  may  be  omitted  by 
the  candidate.  The  examination  for  those  who  present  this  course 
consists  of  a  written  test  upon  questions  closely  connected  with  the 
work  of  the  course,  a  laboratory  examination,  usually  upon  the  exer- 
cises of  the  course,  and  an  examination  of  the  note-books  used  during 
the  progress  of  the  course  in  the  schools.  The  written  examination, 
though  less  important  than  the  other  two,  and  comparatively  easy, 
gives  valuable  evidence  as  to  the  intelligence  with  whicli  the  student 
has  carried  on  his  work  and  the  thoroughness  with  which  he  has 
mastered  its  principles. 

Particular  attention  has  been  given  to  the  question  of  pecuniary 
expense  in  the  arrangement  of  the  laboratory  course,  and  with  such 
success  that  it  is  alread}^  fully  established  in  most  of  the  schools  that 
send  many  students  to  Harvard  and  is  gradually  making  its  way  into 
smaller  schools.  The  pamphlet  describing  this  course  is  called  a 
Descriptive  List  of  Elementary  Physical  Experiments.  It  is  for  sale 
at  the  University  Bookstore,  Cambridge  ;  price  postpaid  forty  cents. 

Advanced  Studies. 

Considerably  more  advanced  training  is  also  required  in  from  two 
to  five  of  the  following  subjects :  Greek,  Latin,  German,  French, 
mathematics,  physics,  chemistr3^  If  Greek  is  omitted  from  among 
the  elementary  subjects,  four  of  these  advanced  subjects  instead  of 
two  must  be  offered,  and  they  must  include  a  considerable  part  of 
the  advanced  mathematics  and  sciences.  For  a  precise  statement 
of  the  omissions  from  the  elementary  list  and  the  corresponding- 
substitutions  from  the  advanced  list  the  student  must  consult  the 
Catalogue. 

There  are  many  schools  which  are  not  prepared  to  furnish  even 
their  best  and  most  ambitious  pupils  with  all  the  training  which 
these  requirements  demand  ;  nevertheless  the  number  of  scliools  and 
small  colleges  which  fit  students  for  Harvard  College  is  large,  as  will 
be  seen  by  consulting  the  Appendix,  and  might  be  much  larger  if 
pupils  and  their  parents  insisted  upon  having  school  facilities  in- 
creased in  localities  where  incompetent  teachers  and  meagre  expendi- 
tures are  not  necessary  evils.  The  best  fitting  schools  for  Harvard 
College  are  those  which  the  table  in  the  Appendix  shows  to  have 
prepared  the  largest  number  of  successful  candidates  in  recent 
years. 

It  does  not  necessarily  follow  because  a  candidate  for  admission 
has  been  poorly  prepared  in  one  or  two  subjects,  owing  to  lack  of 


competent  instruction,  that  he  cannot  enter  Harvard.  If,  by  passing 
creditably  in  the  subjects  in  which  he  has  been  trained,  he  clearly 
shows  capacity  and  ambition,  he  will  be  admitted  on  condition  of 
subsequently  making  up  his  deficiency.  The  number  of  subjects  in 
which  he  ma}?^  be  conditioned  varies  according  to  the  circumstances, 
but  does  not  usually  exceed  three.  After  entering  College  he 
is  allowed  to  cancel  these  conditions,  either  by  passing  examina- 
tions on  the  same  subjects  or  by  taking  as  a  part  of  his  college 
studies  advanced  work  in  the  same  department,  the  satisfactory 
performance  of  which  proves  that  he  has  more  than  made  good  his 
previous  defects.  The  exact  number  of  conditions  allowed  can 
never  be  stated  in  advance  for  the  reason  that  each  case  is  consid- 
ered on  its  merits. 

It  frequently  happens  that  students  who  do  not  feel  that  they  can 
devote  four  years  to  college  study  as  candidates  for  the  degree  of 
A.B.  desire  to  pursue  special  work  leading  to  some  chosen  goal. 
Such  persons  can  obtain  instruction  at  Harvard  b}'  entering  as  spe- 
cial students.  Before  the  opening  of  the  college  ye^v  an  applicant 
files  with  the  Secretary  a  written  application  in  which  his  previous 
training  and  future  plans  are  outlined  ;  and  he  accompanies  this  with 
letters  from  teachers  and  friends  testifying  to  his  character  and 
capacity.  These  papers  are  read  by  a  committee  of  the  Faculty, 
and  if  found  satisfactory  the  candidate  is  allowed  to  register  as  a 
Special  Student  and  to  begin  work  in  such  courses  as  he  may  select 
with  the  approval  of  his  advisers.  If  his  subsequent  conduct  shows 
that  he  is  either  not  studious  or  of  doubtful  character,  he  is  deprived 
of  the  privileges  of  the  University. 

The  process  of  admission  to  regular  standing  and  recognized  can- 
didacy for  a  degree  is  more  complicated.  Most  students  prefer  to 
divide  their  admission  examination  into  two  parts,  taking  one  part 
in  one  year  and  the  remainder  the  next.  Sometimes  they  take  one 
part  in  June  and  the  other  in  September.  Under  no  circumstances 
are  they  allowed  to  divide  their  examinations  into  mci^  than  two 
such  parts.  Where  the  division  is  between  two  years,  the  first  part 
is  called  the  Preliminary  Examination.  In  order  to  be  recognized  as 
a  preliminary  candidate  a  student  must  send  to  the  Secretary  a  clear 
and  explicit  statement  from  the  head-master  of  his  school,  expressing 
the  master's  belief  that  the  student  is  properly  prepared  to  take  cer- 
tain preliminary  examinations  which  the  certificate  must  specify. 
Until  this  certificate  is  received  by  the  Secretary  the  candidate  is  not 
entitled  to  enter  the  examination.  Of  course  this  does  not  prevent 
students  of  limited  opportunities  from  "offering  themselves"  in 
cases  where  they  are  in  fact  preparing  themselves  for  college  ;  but 


20 

in  such  cases  the  candidate  must  state  that  he  is  his  own  teacher  and 
send  an  exact  list  of  the  studies  in  whicli  he  believes  himself  prepared 
to  undergo  examination. 

The  second  set  of  examinations  of  a  candidate  who  divides  between 
two  3'ears  is  called  the  "Finals. "  It  may  follow  the  "Preliminaries  " 
after  an  interval  of  a  year,  a  year  and  three  months,  or  even  two  or 
more  years.  Where  all  the  examinations  are  offered  in  the  same 
year,  whether  part  in  June  or  part  in  September  or  all  at  once,  they 
also  are  called  "  Finals  "  for  the  reason  that  each  examination  taken, 
whether  in  June  or  September,  is  the  final  effort  of  the  candidate  to 
pass  in  that  particular  subject.  Candidates  for  the  "Finals"  are 
not  required  to  present  certificates  of  preparation.  The  penalty  for 
trying  all  the  examinations  in  one  year,  when  preparation  has  been 
insufficient  and  when  such  insufficiency  is  proved  by  failure,  is  that 
the  candidate  obtains  no  certificate  for  the  subjects  passed  and  is 
compelled  to  take  the  entire  examination  over  again.  The  knowledge 
of  the  penalty  is  usually  sufficient  to  prevent  incompetent  persons 
from  undertaking  the  examinations  all  at  once  against  their  teachers' 
advice.  The  only  certificate  required  of  a  final  candidate  is  one  of 
good  moral  character.  This  should  always  come  from  the  principal 
of  his  school,  or,  if  he  has  not  had  a  regular  school  training,  from  a 
clergyman  or  other  responsible  person  well  known  in  the  locality 
where  he  resides.  If  a  student  cannot  show  that  he  is  trusted  and 
respected  in  his  school  and  home,  he  is  not  desired  in  Harvard  Col- 
lege. Any  attempt  to  force  a  person  of  tainted  character  into  the 
midst  of  the  University  community  is  considered  to  be  an  act  deserv- 
ing the  strongest  condemnation. 

The  June  examinations  for  admission  to  Harvard  are  held  simul- 
taneously in  Cambridge,  Quincy,  Groton,  Andover,  Southborough, 
and  Worcester,  Massachusetts  ;  in  Exeter  and  Concord,  New  Hamp- 
shire ;  in  New  York  and  Albany  ;  in  Philadelphia,  Cincinnati,  Cleve- 
land, Chicago,  St.  Louis,  Minneapolis,  Denver,  San  Francisco,  and 
in  London,  Paris,  Bonn,  or  some  equally  accessible  city  in  Europe. 
An  examination  will  ordinarily  be  held  at  any  other  point  distant 
from  those  named,  if  ten  candidates  apply  for  it  as  early  as  April  1. 
In  order  to  enable  the  College  to  know  how  many  candidates  are 
to  be  provided  for  at  each  of  the  regular  places  of  examination, 
notice  of  intention  to  take  examinations  in  places  outside  of  Cam- 
bridge must  be  sent  to  the  Secretary  in  time  to  reach  him  by  June 
11th.  If  the  examinations  are  taken  in  Cambridge,  no  fee  is 
charged ;  l)ut,  if  taken  elsewhere,  payment  of  $5  is  required  to 
b(!  made  to  the  liiirsar  as  eai'ly  as  June  11th.  Tlie  payment 
should  b(^  made  by  (;heck  or  money-order  drawn  to  the  order  of  the 


21 

Bursar.  Money  should  not  be  trusted  to  the  mail.  The  check  should 
be  sent  to  the  Bursar  direct  and  not  under  cover  to  any  other  officer. 
One  fee  covers  both  "Preliminaries"  and  "Finals"  and  the  two 
sets  of  examinations  need  not  be  taken  in  the  same  place.  Full 
details  regarding  the  examinations,  including  sets  of  papers  used  in 
previous  years,  are  furnished  by  the  Secretary  on  request. 

A  candidate  for  admission  to  Harvard  by  the  usual  process  of 
examination  will  find  no  difficulty  in  taking  his  examinations,  pro- 
vided he  notes  with  reasonable  care  the  directions  given  him  by  the 
officers  in  charge.  There  is  no  need  for  any  well-prepared  candidate 
to  feel  nervous  or  timid.  He  is  one  of  hundreds  passing  through  the 
same  ordeal,  all  equally  new  to  the  situation  which  challenges  their 
courage.  If  he  is  really  prepared  to  enter  College,  the  College  is 
quite  ready  to  admit  him.  The  examination-books  will  be  read  and 
passed  upon  in  ignorance  of  his  identity,  and  the  utmost  impartialit}^ 
will  be  shown  in  judging  his  efforts  at  each  stage  of  his  progress. 
Honesty  in  examinations  is  unquestionably  the  rule  at  Harvard. 
Opportunities  to  "  crib  "  are  few  ;  public  opinion  is  against  cheating 
of  any  kind ;  and  dishonesty,  if  detected,  deprives  the  candidate  of 
the  chance  to  enter  College. 

Information  regarding  the  results  of  the  June  examinations  is 
given  to  final  candidates  within  a  day  or  two  after  the  close  of  the 
examinations  and  to  preliminary  candidates  about  ten  days  later. 
The  autumn  examinations  are  over  several  days  before  College  opens, 
so  that  persons  admitted  then  have  time  to  get  settled  before  attend- 
ance at  lectures  begins.  Admission  or  preliminary  certificates  are  as 
good  one  or  more  years  after  date  as  when  issued,  but  dela}^  in  enter- 
ing College  is  not  favored. 

Mention  has  already  been  made  of  admission  to  advanced  stand- 
ing in  the  college  classes.  This  may  be  obtained  by  examination  or 
through  recognition  of  work  well  done  at  another  college.  The  usual 
process  where  a  student  at  another  college  wishes  to  be  transferred 
to  Harvard,  is  for  him  to  fill  out  a  blank  furnished  by  the  Secretary, 
stating  in  detail  all  his  previous  work  in  fitting  for  college  and  after 
entering  it.  This  he  supports  by  certificates  and  rank-lists  showing 
his  class-standing,  and  forwards  them  through  the  Secretary  to  the 
Committee  on  Admission  from  other  Colleges.  After  allowing  full 
credit  for  all  his  work  as  measured  by  Harvard  standards,  this  Com- 
mittee decides  in  which  of  the  four  college  classes  the  candidate 
belongs.  It  occasionally,  though  rarel}',  happens  that  students  com- 
ing from  the  same  class  at  home  are  admitted  to  different  standings 
in  Harvard  College,  owing  to  marked  ditference  in  their  scholarship 
or  preparatory  training.     Any  student  of  limited  means  and  high 


22 


rank  who  is  transferred  by  the  advice  of  his  teachers  from  another 
college  to  Harvard,  is  in  most  cases  certain  to  receive  favorable  answer 
to  an  application  for  aid  from  the  Price  Greenleaf  fund.  His  appli- 
cation most  be  filed  before  Ma}'  1.  The  amount  given  varies  from 
$150  to  $250.  Applications  for  admission  to  advanced  standing- 
are  promptly  considered  at  any  time  in  the  year,  summer  included. 
Students  admitted  to  advanced  standing  are  given  a  cordial  welcome 
on  their  arrival  in  Cambridge  by  members  of  the  Intercollegiate 
Club  which  is  composed  wholly  of  persons  who  have  come  to  Har- 
vard from  other  colleges.  The  club  usualh^  has  a  membership  of 
over  a  hundred.  During  the  past  eight  years  over  250  students  from 
other  colleges  have  entered  the  undergraduate  classes  in  Harvard 
College.  They  have  come  from  the  following  institutions  —  ninety- 
one  in  number  :  —  * 


Acadia, 
Adelbert, 
Albion, 
Amherst, 
Andover    Theol. 


Semi- 


nary, 

Atlanta,  , 

Augustana, 

Beloit, 

Bethany, 

Boston  College, 

Boston  University, 

Bowdoin, 

Brooklyn  Polytechnic  In- 
stitute, 

Brown, 

Bucknell, 

Cambridge  Epis.  Theol. 
School, 

Carleton, 

Charleston, 

Colby, 

College  of  the  City  of 
New  York, 

Columbia, 

Columbian, 

Cornell  (N.Y.), 

Cornell  (Iowa), 

Dalhousie, 

Dartmouth, 

Drury, 

Eminence, 

Emporia, 


Eureka, 
Eisk, 

Erankfurt  Gymnasium, 
Georgetown, 
Grinnell, 
Grove  City, 
Hamilton, 
Hamline, 
Haverford, 
Hillsdale, 
Hobart, 

Howard  College,  Ala. 
Howard  University, 
Illinois  State  Normal, 
Iowa  State  University, 
Kenyon, 
Knox, 
Lafayette, 
Lawrence, 
Lebanon  Valley, 
Madison, 
Marietta, 

Mass.  Institute  of  Tech- 
nology, 
Mt.  Allison, 
Northwestern, 
Oberlin, 
Ohio  Wesleyan, 
Princeton, 
Racine, 
Ripon, 
Rochester, 
St.  Erancis, 


St.  Lawrence, 

St.  Stephen's, 

South  Carolina, 

S  outhwestern  Pre  sby  terian , 

Swarthmore, 

Syracuse, 

Trinity, 

Tufts, 

Tulane, 

Union  Theol.  Seminary, 

University  of  Alabama, 
"  "  California, 

"  "  Georgia, 

"  "  Kansas, 

"  "  Michigan, 

"  "  Missouri, 

"  "  New    Bruns- 

wick, 
"  "  North    Caro- 

lina, 
"  "  Oregon, 

"  "Pennsylvania, 

"  "  Vermont, 

"  "  Virginia, 

Vanderbilt, 

Washington, 

Wesleyan, 

Williams, 

Wittenburg, 

Wooster, 

Worcester  Polytechnic  In- 
stitute, 

Yale. 


23 

A  graduate  of  another  college  who  wishes  to  take  the  degree  of 
Bachelor  of  Arts  at  Harvard  College  may  register  either  as  an  under- 
graduate or  as  a  member  of  the  Graduate  School.  The  same  courses 
of  instruction  are  open  to  him  in  either  case  and  the  requirements 
imposed  for  the  degree  will  be  the  same. 

Students  entering  with  advanced  standing  are  enabled  by  special 
provisions  in  the  Regulations  to  compete  for  degrees  with  distinction 
and  for  Honors. 

The  college  year  opens  on  the  Thursday  following  the  last 
Wednesday  in  September.  On  entering  College  every  Freshman 
and  Special  Student  finds  himself  assigned  to  some  member  of 
the  Faculty  who  acts  as  his  adviser  in  the  selection  of  his  studies 
and  in  other  matters  relating  to  his  new  life.  The  student 
deposits  with  the  Bursar  either  a  bond  signed  by  two  satisfactory 
sureties  or  a  sum  of  money  sufficient  to  cover  his  immediate  future 
liabilities  ;  he  secures  a  seat  at  Memorial  Hall,  or  in  some  other 
boarding-place  ;  registers  in  the  morning  of  the  first  day  of  the  term, 
and  enrolls  himself  in  the  classes  of  the  professors  with  whom  he  is 
to  take  courses.  Thenceforward  his  duties  are  clear.  They  are, 
however,  looked  upon  by  the  University  as  duties  to  himself  and  his 
parents,  rather  than  to  the  College.  Every  student  is  at  the  outset 
presumed  to  have  come  to  Cambridge  for  the  purpose  of  gaining  an 
education.  If  he  seems  to  be  in  danger  of  forgetting  this  he  is 
warned  ;  later,  admonished  and  a  letter  sent  to  his  home  ;  then,  if 
the  presumption  of  good  purpose  is  negatived  by  conclusive  evidence 
of  his  unfitness  to  care  for  himself,  he  is  placed  on  probation,  cut  off 
from  many  privileges  and  honors,  and  informed  that  an}^  further 
neglect  of  work  will  result  in  his  ceasing  to  be  a  member  of  the 
University.  Students  who  reach  the  point  of  being  sent  away  are,  as 
a  rule,  manifestly  unfit  for  college  life.  In  the  rare  cases  of  actual 
misconduct,  the  penalties  of  suspension,  dismission,  and  expulsion 
are  enforced. 

The  work  of  the  Freshman  year  consists  of  sixteen  hours  a  week 
of  lectures  and  recitations,  not  counting  any  laboratory  or  field  work 
which  may  be  taken.  Most  of  the  courses  of  study  begin  in  Sep- 
tember and  continue  till  June.  Some  end  in  February  and  are  com- 
plementary^ to  other  half-courses  beginning  then  and  continuing  till 
June.  The  3^ear  is  not  divided  into  terms  or  semesters,  but  is  a  unit 
in  itself.  Consequently  entering  College  in  the  middle  of  the  year  is 
un advisable,  and  is  rarely  allowed  candidates  for  a  degree.  The  work 
of  the  three  later  years  of  the  college  course  consists  of  twelve  hours 
of  lectures  each  week  with  a  steadily-increasing  amount  of  laboratory 
work,  thesis  writing,  and  outside  reading  and   research.     By  special 


24 

consent  of  the  Faculty  a  considerable  number  of  students  do  the  work 
of  four  years  in  three.  Such  persons  are  usually  above  the  average 
in  age  and  attainments  and  are  apt  to  be  of  limited  means.  The 
elective  courses  of  study  offered  by  the  Faculty  of  Arts  and  Sciences 
in  1890-91  numbered  255.  Of  these  about  50  are  open  to  Freshmen. 
The  departments  in  which  instruction  is  given  are  Semitic  and  Indo- 
Iranian  languages,  Classics,  Modern  Languages,  Philosophy,  Political 
Economy,  History,  Fine  Arts,  Music,  Mathematics,  Civil,  Topo- 
graphical and  Electrical  Engineering,  Physics,  Chemistry,  Botany, 
Zoology,  Geology,  and  American  Archaeology.  While  in  one  sense 
an  upper-classman  may  elect  anj^  of  these  courses,  it  is  usually  the 
case  that  his  previous  training  has  fitted  him  to  take  only  a  lim- 
ited number  of  them,  the  advanced  and  technical  courses  in  each 
department  requiring  careful  elementary  training  to  be  pursued  suc- 
cessfully. The  Annual  Announcement  of  Courses  of  Instruction 
commonly  known  as  the  "  Elective  Pamphlet,"  and  descriptive 
pamplets  of  the  various  departments,  are  issued  in  May  of  each 
year,  and  contain  detailed  information  regarding  these  courses.  They 
may  be  obtained  at  any  time  upon  application  to  the  Secretary. 
During  the  year  instructors  in  the  various  courses  of  study  submit 
their  students  to  frequent  tests  to  ascertain  whether  they  are  pursu- 
ing their  work  systematically.  In  all,  except  laboratory  courses  or 
others  affording  constant  intercourse  between  instructors  and  stu- 
dents, a  written  examination  lasting  an  hour  is  the  commonest  form 
of  test.  Early  in  February  the  mid-year  examinations  are  held, 
continuing  for  a  fortnight.  Each  examination  lasts  three  hours  and 
covers  the  work  done  during  the  first  half-year.  In  June,  at  the 
close  of  the  year,  the  final  examinations  are  held.  They  are  similar 
in  character  to  the  "  mid-years,"  both  being  written  examinations. 

After  the  final  examinations  Instructors  return  grades  based  upon 
the  student's  work  for  the  year  and  these  grades  determine  whether 
students  are  promoted  or  "dropped."  A  "dropped"  student  is, 
under  the  rules,  on  probation  at  the  opening  of  the  next  Academic 
year,  and  is  sometimes  obliged  to  report  daily  to  a  tutor  or  officer  of 
the  University  until  his  period  of  probation  is  over.  The  results  of 
the  year's  work  are  made  known  during  the  summer  by  printed  rank- 
lists  containing  the  names  of  the  high  scholars  in  each  course,  and 
by  private  letters,  stating  the  low  grades. 

Immediately  after  the  final  examinations  in  June  comes  the  Seniors' 
Class-Day  and  a  few  days  later  Commencement,  when  the  many  gradu- 
ates of  the  College  and  Professional  Schools  receive  their  diplomas  at 
the  hands  of  the  President. 

Class-Day  is  the  gala  day  of  the  Seniors,  and  thousands  of  guests 


,  25 

gathered  from  various  parts  of  the  country  enjoy  its  varied  pro- 
gramme. Tlie  Class-Day  officers  are  chosen  by  ballot  at  a  full 
meeting  of  the  class  held  in  the  October  previous.  The  Commence- 
ment-Day speakers  are  appointed  on  account  of  high  scholarship, 
the  merit  of  their  parts,  and  their  method  of  delivering  them.  The 
degree  of  Bachelor  of  Arts  is  given  in  four  grades,  the  degree  with- 
out distinction,  the  degree  cum  laude^  magna  cum  laude,  and  summa 
cum  laude.  Remarkable  excellence  in  any  department  secures  the 
graduate  Honors  or  Highest  Honors. 

A  lower  grade  of  excellence  is  rewarded  by  Honorable  Mention  in 
the  favorite  subject.  All  students  whose  records  at  the  close  of  the 
Junior  jesiv  indicate  that  they  will  probably  receive  a  degree  with 
distinction  are  entitled  to  write  Commencement  Parts  in  competition 
for  the  honor  of  being  chosen  to  deliver  them.  By  winning  honors 
in  any  department  a  degree  with  distinction  is  secured,  but  the  more 
common  ground  of  a  degree  with  distinction  is  general  excellence  in 
the  entire  work  of  the  four  years. 


26 


THE   GRADUATE   SCHOOL. 

A  graduate  of  any  college  or  scientific  school  of  good  standing  is 
admitted  to  the  Graduate  School  on  presentation  of  his  diploma  or 
some  equally  satisfactory  certificate  of  graduation.  Members  of  this 
department  are  not  necessarily  candidates  for  any  degree  ;  but  they 
may  become  candidates  for  the  degree  of  A.M.,  Ph.D.,  or  S.D.,  by 
permission  of  the  Administrative  Board  of  the  School.  Under  certain 
circumstances,  explained  below,  they  may  become  candidates  for  the 
degree  of  A.B.  They  may  pursue  an}-  of  the  courses  of  study  offered 
in  the  department  of  Arts  and  Sciences,  and  may  also  take  any  of  the 
studies  offered  in  the  Professional  Schools.  The  choice  of  studies  of 
each  student  must  be  approved  by  the  Administrative  Board  of  the 
School ;  but  any  reasonable  selection  of  studies  suitable  to  the  student's 
attainments  is  always  approved.  A  student  who  means  to  present  him- 
self for  a  degree,  or  one  who  holds  a  fellowship  or  scholarship,  is  ex- 
pected to  do  full  work  ;  and  this  requirement  is  ordinarily  interpreted 
to  mean  that  he  must  take  in  each  year  the  equivalent  of  four  courses 
of  study  of  advanced  grade.  Other  students  may  take  a  smaller 
number  of  courses,  and  devote  a  part  of  their  time  to  other  pursuits. 
If  a  student  in  the  Graduate  School,  who  is  not  a  graduate  of 
Harvard  College  or  of  the  Lawrence  Scientific  School,  wishes  to 
become  a  candidate  for  a  degree,  he  must  first  apply  to  the  Com- 
mittee of  the  Faculty  on  Admission  from  other  Colleges  for  a  state- 
ment of  the  conditions  under  which  he  can  receive  the  degree  for 
which  he  wishes  to  become  a  candidate. 

Persons  who  have  never  received  any  academic  degree  are  permit- 
ted to  register  in  the  Graduate  School,  if  in  the  judgment  of  the 
Administrative  Board  they  are  of  suitable  age  and  attainments.  If 
of  lower  standing  in  these  respects,  they  may  be  admitted  to  one  of 
the  undergraduate  classes  or  to  the  list  of  Special  Students  in  the 
College  or  the  Scientific  School.  Those  admitted  to  the  Graduate 
School  must  be  men  of  high  scholarship,  who  are  fully  competent  to 
engage  in  advanced  studies.  They  cannot  become  candidates  for  one 
of  the  higher  degrees  unless  they  show  that  they  have  fulfilled  all 
the  substantial  requirements  for  the  degree  of  A.B.  or  S.B. 

If  any  student  wishes  to  bQcome  a  candidate  for  a  degree,  his  course 
of  study  must  be  approved  as  suitable  for  a  student  having  that  inten- 
tion. In  April  of  each  year  members  of  the  Graduate  Scliool  are  called 
upon  to  state  definitely  whether  they  wish  to  be  candidates  for  a  degree 
in  the  following  June.  Persons  whose  previous  course  of  study  has 
been  accepted,  without  special  conditions,  as  qualifying  them  to  be 


27 

candidates  for  the  degree  of  A.M.,  are  admitted  to  that  degree  on 
passing  with  high  credit  in  four  advanced  courses  of  study,  or  their 
equivalent,  provided  they  have  been  in  continuous  residence  during 
at  least  one  academic  year.  The  degree  of  A.B.  is  often  conferred 
upon  members  of  the  Glraduate  School  who  are  not  already  grad- 
uates of  Harvard  College,  and  whose  previous  training  does  not 
fit  them  to  become  candidates  for  the  degree  of  A.M.  in  their  first 
year  of  residence.  At  least  two  years  of  residence  are  required  of 
candidates  for  the  degree  of  Ph.D.  or  S.D.  The  only  variation 
from  this  rule  is  in  the  case  of  graduates  of  Harvard  College  or 
of  the  Scientific  School  who  study  in  part  outside  of  Cambridge 
under  guidance  of  members  of  the  Faculty.  For  them  one  of  the  two 
years  of  residence,  but  not  of  systematic  work,  is  sometimes  remitted 
on  the  ground  of  their  previous  residence.  Every  candidate  for  the 
degree  of  S.D.  (except  such  as  hold  the  two  degrees  of  A.B.  and 
S.B.  from  this  University)  is  compelled  to  devote  a  third  year  to 
study  or  research,  but  it  need  not  be  spent  in  Cambridge.  The 
degree  of  Ph.D.  or  S.D.  is  not  given  to  every  candidate  who  studies 
faithfully  the  required  number  of  years  or  in  fulfilment  of  a  deter- 
minate programme.  A  thesis  showing  original  treatment  of  an  ap- 
proved subject,  or  giving  evidence  of  independent  research,  and 
thorough  examinations  on  a  broad  and  connected  field  of  study,  are 
the  final  tests  of  the  candidate's  fitness  to  receive  one  of  these  sig- 
nificant and  valued  degrees.  If  by  these  tests  he  is  found  wanting, 
his  term  of  study  must  be  prolonged  or  his  hopes  of  attaining  the 
degree  relinquished.  Detailed  statements  regarding  the  requirements 
for  the  degrees  of  A.M.,  Ph.D.,  and  S.D.  are  to  be  found  in  the 
Graduate  School  pamphlet,  which  can  be  obtained  on  application  to 
the  Secretary. 

During  the  years  from  1880  to  1890,  students  from  78  different 
American  and  foreign  colleges  and  universities  were  admitted  to  the 
Graduate  School.  During  the  present  year  40  institutions  are  repre- 
sented in  the  School. 

The  aggregate  annual  value  of  the  fellowships  and  scholarships 
assignable  to  students  in  the  Graduate  School  is  $19,950.  Details 
regarding  these  aids  will  be  found  in  the  Graduate  School  pamphlet. 
They  must  be  applied  for  before  March  31.  Applications  from  per- 
sons not  already  members  of  the  University  should  be  accompanied 
by  testimonials  from  instructors,  original  publications,  and  any  sim- 
ilar material  which  will  supply  evidence  of  the  candidate's  fitness  for 
appointment.  No  preference  is  given  to  graduates  of  Harvard  Uni- 
versity except  in  a  few  cases  where  such  preference  is  required  by  the 
terms  of  the  foundation  of  the  fellowship  or  scholarship.     In  some 


28 

cases  the  preference  is  given  to  persons  not  graduates  of  Harvard 
University,  or  who  have  first  been  graduated  at  some  other  college. 

In  order  that  any  year  in  the  Graduate  School  may  be  counted  as 
a  year  of  residence,  registration  should  take  place  as  early  as  the  last 
Thursday  in  September,  at  the  opening  of  the  academic  year.  But 
students  are  admitted  to  the  Graduate  School  at  any  time  in  the 
year ;  the  conditions  of  their  registration  being  fixed  in  each  case  by 
the  Administrative  Board. 

The  Graduate  School  has  _ecently  been  reorganized  under  the 
Faculty  of  Arts  and  Sciences  in  such  a  manner  as  to  bring  it  forward 
as  an  important  department  from  the  point  of  view  of  liberal  learning, 
and  to  put  it  in  relations  of  mutual  support  with  the  College  and 
Scientific  School,  so  that  it  will  now  enjoy,  far  more  satisfactorily  than 
heretofore,  its  full  share  of  the  attention  of  the  instructors  and  of  the 
life  of  the  University.  The  opportunities  for  advanced  study  which 
it  offers  should  be  carefully  considered  by  persons  who  desire  to 
carry  their  scholarship  beyond  the  point  reached  by  the  college  grad- 
uate. Young  men  who  are  looking  to  careers  as  teachers,  journalists, 
writers,  economists,  and  legislators,  or  in  any  other  literary  or  purely 
scientific  profession,  ought,  if  possible,  to  devote  a  year  or  two  to 
systematic  study  in  such  higher  fields  of  learning  as  they  wish  to 
qualify  themselves  to  cultivate  in  the  best  manner.  It  is  no  longer 
true  that  a  mere  college  education "  is  enough  in  this  country  to  pre- 
pare a  man  for  good,  intellectual  work  in  his  generation,  without 
some  higher  and  more  special  training.  The  Graduate  School  may 
be  regarded  as  the  professional  department  for  the  literary  and  purely 
scientific  professions  ;  and  the  growth  of  its  numbers  in  the  past  few 
years  indicates  that  it  is  beginning  to  take  its  proper  place,  from  that 
point  of  view,  in  the  general  estimation. 

All  the  privileges  of  students  in  the  University  are  open  to  a 
member  of  the  Graduate  School.  He  may,  under  suitable  and  lib- 
eral conditions,  enjoy  the  use  of  the  various  libraries,  laboratories, 
and  museums  of  the  University  ;  he  may  take  courses  in  any  of  its 
departments  without  extra  payment ;  he  may  attend  its  public  lec- 
tures and  readings ;  he  may  use  the  Gymnasium  and  Athletic 
Grounds ;  he  may  be  admitted  to  the  Dining  Hall,  the  Foxcroft 
Club,  etc.  ;  he  may  obtain  a  college  room  ;  he  may  be  elected  into 
the  students'  societies  and  the  departmental  clubs  ;  he  may  gain 
access  to  valuable  libraries  and  collections  in  the  neighborhood  of 
the  University.  If  a  zealous  and  competent  student,  he  will  find 
every  provision  made  for  his  advancement  which  the  ample  resources 
of  the  University  [)ermit. 


29 


THE   SCIENTIFIC   SCHOOL. 

The  Lawrence  Scientific  School  is  situated  in  Cambridge  in  close 
proximity  to  the  College  Yard  and  dormitories,  Memorial  Hall,  the 
Observatory,  the  principal  laboratories  and  museums.  The  School 
presents  five  thoroughly  equipped  departments  of  study :  Civil  and 
Topographical  Engineering,  Electrical  Engineering,  Chemistry,  Geol- 
ogy, and  Biology.  As  the  instruction  given  in  the  School  is  open  to 
the  students  of  the  College  —  hundreds  of  whom  are  allowed  to  make 
scientific  work  tlie  basis  of  their  course  for  the  degree  of  Bachelor  of 
Arts  —  the  number  of  candidates  for  the  degree  of  Bachelor  of  Sci- 
ence affords  no  indication  of  the  number  of  students  actually  engaged 
in  scientific  study.  Instructors  of  various  grades  employed  by  the 
School  have  their  headquarters  in  the  laboratories  and  museums,  the 
Botanic  Garden,  the  Herbarium,  and  other  centres  of  scientific  work. 
The  admission  requirements  are  fewer  than  those  of  the  College 
and  consist  of  the  following  subjects:  history,  algebra,  plane 
geometry,  logarithms,  plane  trigonometry  with  its  applications  to 
surveying  and  navigation,  physical  science,  French  or  German, 
and  English,  If  the  candidate  is  to  enter  the  course  in  Civil  En- 
gineering, he  must  pass  admission  examinations  —  in  addition  to 
those  just  named  —  in  solid  geometry  or  the  elements  of  analytical 
geometry.  The  admission  examinations  are  held  at  the  same  times 
and  places  as  those  of  the  College.  The  School  admits  to  advanced 
standing,  without  examination,  on  proof  of  high  scholarship  else- 
where. The  School  has  in  its  gift  twelve  scholarships  of  an  annual 
value  of  $150  each.  Eight  of  these  scholarships  are  assignable  to 
graduates  of  reputable  Normal  Schools  in  the  United  States.  The 
incumbents  are  appointed  in  the  first  instance  upon  the  recommenda- 
tion of  the  principals  of  the  schools  from  which  they  come.  Scientific 
School  students  have  the  same  rights  in  the  dining  clubs,  dormitories, 
gymnasium,  athletic  fields,  and  other  conveniences  of  the  University 
which  college  undergraduates  enjoy.  They  ma}-  take  courses  in  other 
departments  of  the  University  without  extra  charge.  Special  Students 
are  admitted  to  the  School  in  much  the  same  way  and  upon  the  same 
terms  that  Special  Students  are  admitted  to  the  College. 


30 


THE   DIVINITY   SCHOOL. 

The  Harvard  Divinity  School  is  non-sectarian,  its  Constitution 
prescribing  tliat  "  every  encouragement  be  given  to  tlie  serious,  im- 
partial, and  unbiased  investigation  of  Christian  truth,  and  that  no 
assent  to  the  peculiarities  of  any  denomination  of  Christians  shall  be 
required  either  of  the  instructors  or  students."  The  Baptist,  Con- 
gregational and  Unitarian  denominations  are  represented  in  its 
Faculty.  It  admits  to  its  classes  as  candidates  for  the  degree  of 
D.B.  only  persons  who  have  received  the  degree  of  A.B.,  or  who 
satisfy  the  Faculty  that  their  education  has  been  equal  to  that  of 
graduates  of  the  best  New  England  colleges.  Persons  not  candi- 
dates for  the  degree  of  D.B.  may  be  admitted  as  special  students  on 
examination  in  Latin  and  Greek.  Students  can  be  admitted  to  ad- 
vanced standing  only  on  examination,  except  that  graduates  of  other 
theological  schools  who  have  received  the  degree  of  A.B.  and  who 
bring  evidence  of  high  standing,  may  be  admitted  to  the  Senior  class 
without  examination.  G-raduates  of  other  theological  schools,  not 
candidates  for  the  degree  of  D.B.,  may  be  admitted  as  resident  grad- 
uates. Such  students  are  encouraged  to  do  independent  work  in  any 
department  of  theological  study  and  ma}^  take  part  in  any  of  the 
exercises  of  the  School.  The  degree  of  D.B.  is  given  to  successful 
candidates  after  a  residence  of  three  years,  to  which  a  year  of  post- 
graduate study  may  be  added.  The  instruction  of  the  School  includes 
courses  in  Hebrew,  Jewish  and  Classical  Aramaic,  The  History  of 
Israel  both  Political  and  Religious,  New  Testament  Introduction, 
Criticism  and  Interpretation,  Church  History  and  the  Historj^  of  Doc- 
trine, The  Philosophy  of  Religion,  Systematic  Theology,  Comparative 
Religion,  The  Ethics  of  Social  Reform,  Homiletics,  Pastoral  Care, 
and  Elocution.  Its  studies  are  to  some  extent  elective,  about  fifty 
percent  more  hours  of  class-work  being  offered  than  are  required  for 
the  degree.  Students,  except  special  students,  may  take  courses  in 
other  departments  of  the  University  without  charge.  The  School  is 
amply  endowed  with  scholarships  and  other  beneliciarj^  funds,  the 
income  of  which  is  assigned  to  graduate  and  other  students  without 
regard  to  denominational  differences.  A  certain  grade  of  scholarship 
must,  however,  be  reached  in  order  that  such  help  may  be  received. 
Its  students  have  included  since  IHS.)  graduates  of  the  following  46 
colleges  and  15  schools  of  theology.  Those  marked  with  an  asterisk 
are  represented  in  the  School  the  current  year,  181)0-1)1. 


31 


Colleges. 

Alleghany, 

Iowa, 

*Tufts, 

*  Amherst, 

*  Johns  Hopkins, 

University  of  Chicago, 

*Antioch, 

Lebanon  Valley, 

" 

'    Georgia, 

*Bates, 

London  University, 

" 

'   Kansas, 

Boston  University, 

McGill, 

a 

'  Michigan, 

Bowdoin, 

*Mt.  Allison, 

" 

'  N.  Carolina 

Brown, 

Mt.  Union, 

" 

'  Vermont, 

Canton, 

*New  Jersey, 

" 

'  Washington 

*Colby, 

Olivet, 

" 

'*Wisconsin, 

Columbia, 

*Ottawa, 

*Washington 

University 

*Dashisha,  Japan, 

Owens, 

(Missouri 

), 

Denver, 

Pennsylvania, 

Western, 

De  Pauw, 

Princeton, 

Williams, 

*Harvard, 

Racine, 

Wooster, 

*Hillsdale, 

*St.  Stephen's, 

Yale. 

Illinois  Wesleyan, 

Trinity, 
Theological  Seminaries 

*Andover, 

*Meadville, 

South  Baptist, 

*Bangor, 

Methodist  College, 

Tufts, 

Boston, 

Belfast,  Ireland, 

Union, 

*  Canton, 

Newton, 

Western, 

Hillsdale, 

Princeton, 

Yale. 

32 


THE  LAW   SCHOOL. 

The  course  for  the  degree  of  Bachelor  of  Laws  is  three  years  in 
length.  Instruction  is  given  in  the  following  subjects  :  Torts,  Crim- 
inal Law,  Contracts,  Real  Property,  Common  Law  Pleading,  Equity 
Pleading  and  Jurisdiction,  Bills  and  Notes,  Evidence,  Sales,  Trusts, 
Agenc}^,  Partnership,  Corporations,  Suret3'ship  and  Mortgage,  Wills 
and  Administration,  Constitutional  Law,  Law  of  Persons,  Points  in 
Legal  History.  The  method  of  instruction  applied  in  the  School  is 
singularly  effective.  Principles  are  learned  not  by  memorizing  the 
pages  of  text-books,  but  by  analyzing  leading  English  and  American 
cases  which  include  in  their  decisions  and  dicta  the  living  body  of 
the  law.  A  student  of  ability  who  spends  three  years  of  intelli- 
gent effort  in  the  School  is  equipped,  except  in  one  particular, 
for  active  professional  labor  in  any  part  of  the  Union.  The  ex- 
ception is  the  practice  and  statute  law  of  his  own  State,  but  his 
familiarity  with  the  fundamental  principles  of  law  makes  the  task  of 
mastering  local  practice  comparatively  easy.  Honor  graduates  of 
the  School  are  certain  to  receive  invitations  to  enter  leading  Law 
offices  in  various  parts  of  the  country.  During  the  ten  years  from 
1880  to  1890,  475  graduates  of  Harvard  and  249  graduates  of  other 
colleges  attended  the  School.  To  gain  admission  to  candidacy  for 
the  degree  of  LL.B.  a  student  is  required,  on  entering,  to  show  that 
he  is  a  graduate  of  a  college  or  scientific  school  of  good  standing,  or 
to  pass  creditable  examinations  on  Blackstone's  Commentaries  and 
in  either  Latin,  French,  or  German.  Special  students  are  admitted 
without  examination  on  presenting  good  testimonials.  A  limited 
number  of  scholarships  are  assigned  each  year  to  needy  students  of 
at  least  one  year's  standing  whose  rank  seems  to  justify  giving  them 
assistance. 

The  most  promising  students  of  each  class  are  elected  members  of 
the  Law  Clubs,  several  of  which  have  been  in  existence  in  the  School 
for  many  years,  and  include  in  their  lists  of  former  members  jurists 
of  national  and  local  reputation.  These  clubs  are  most  useful  aux- 
iliaries to  regular  work,  requiring  their  members  to  prepare  and 
argue  each  week  cases  illustrating  the  most  difficult  problems  under 
discussion  in  the  lecture-rooms.  The  members  of  the  Faculty  and 
other  instructors,  nine  in  number,  reside  near  the  School  and  almost 
without  exception  devote  their  entire  time  to  the  work  of  the  School 
and  the  personal  needs  of  the  students.     The  regular  course  of  stud}^ 


33 

for  the  degree  of  LL.B.  calls  for  ten  hours  a  week  in  the  lecture- 
rooms  during  the  first  year,  ten  duiiug  the  second,  and  eight  during 
the  third.  For  the  Honor  degree  ten  hours  are  required  in  the  third 
year.  The  average  student  of  merit  works  seven  or  eight  hours  a 
day  in  the  School  including  his  lecture  hours.  Examinations  are  held 
in  June  on  the  work  of  the  year.  Only  students  of  great  promise  are 
admitted  to  the  Honor  degree.  Of  these  Honor  candidates,  those 
who  are  graduates  of  Harvard  College,  or  who  have  had  their  aca- 
demic work  recognized  by  the  Faculty  of  Arts  and  Sciences  as  equal 
in.  value  to  that  of  the  Harvard  degree  of  A.B.,  receive  the  degree  of 
A.M.  with  the  degree  of  LL.B.  cum  laude.  Graduates  of  other  col- 
leges whose  degrees  are  not  recognized  by  the  Faculty  of  Arts  and 
Sciences  as  fully  equal  in  value  to  the  Harvard  degree  of  A.B.  are 
enabled  —  provided  they  make  early  application  —  to  equalize  their 
acquirements  by  pursuing  one  or  more  elective  studies  in  the  College. 

At  least  two  full  years  of  residence  are  required  of  every  candidate 
for  the  degree.  Sometimes  students  pass  advanced-standing  exami- 
nations and  enter  at  the  beginning  of  the  second  year.  Sometimes 
they  omit  residence  in  the  second  year  —  taking  the  examinations, 
however,  at  the  usual  time  —  and  sometimes  they  leave  the  School  at 
the  end  of  the  second  year  and  return  to  take  the  third-year  examina- 
tions at  the  end  of  that  year.  Graduates  of  Harvard  or  of  other 
colleges  who  have  had  their  degrees  approved  by  the  Faculty  of  Arts 
and  Sciences,  and  who  are  not  candidates  for  the  degree  of  LL.B., 
may  obtain  the  degree  of  Master  of  Arts  after  one  year's  satisfactory 
study  in  the  School,  or  may  take  a  part  of  their  work  in  the  School 
and  the  remainder  in  the  Graduate  School. 

Up  to  July,  1890,  2329  persons  had  been  graduated  from  the  Law 
School.  Austin  Hall,  first  occupied  by  the  School  in  1883,  is  archi- 
tecturally one  of  the  most  satisfactory  buildings  in  Cambridge. 


34 


THE   MEDICAL   SCHOOL. 

The  Harvard  Medical  School  is  situated  on  Boylston  Street,  Boston, 
in  a  building  completed  in  1883  at  a  total  cost,  including  laud,  of 
$321,415.62.  It  is  the  largest  of  the  Professional  Schools  of  the 
University  and  one  of  the  oldest,  haviug  given  degrees  since  1  788.  In 
all  it  has  graduated  3116  persons.  It  gives  the  degree  of  M.D.  after 
either  three  or  four  years  of  successful  study  and  examination.  The 
four-years'  course  is  favored  by  the  Faculty  and  taken  by  a  part  of 
the  most  promising  students.  Graduates  of  colleges,  scientific 
schools,  or  medical  schools  are  admitted  to  the  School  without  exam- 
ination. Non-graduates  are  required  to  pass  in  the  following  sub- 
jects :  English,  Latin,  physics,  and  also  in  either  French,  German, 
algebra,  plane  geometry,  or  botany.  Since  1880,  833  students 
have  entered  the  School.  Of  these  182  were  graduates  of  Harvard 
College,  224  held  degrees  from  other  colleges,  and  427  had  taken  no 
degree. 

The  standard  of  the  School  is  high,  its  examinations  are  severe, 
and  its  facilities  of  all  kinds  great.  The  Boston  hosf)itals,  noted 
for  their  model  administration,  are  in  close  sympathy  with  the 
School,  and  draw  upon  its  best  graduates  for  services  of  a  mutually 
advantageous  kind.  The  School  employs  22  professors  and  assistant 
professors  and  52  other  instructors  and  lecturers,  many  of  whom 
are  specialists  of  reputation.  The  School  has  a  moderate  number 
of  scholarships  and  other  pecuniary  aids  in  its  gift  which  are  given 
only  upon  clear  proof  of  merit.  In  addition  to  its  regular  instruc- 
tion leading  to  the  degree  of  M.D.,  the  School  offers  graduate 
instruction  of  a  grade  heretofore  usually  sought  for  only  in  British 
or  Continental  schools.  This  instruction  is  wholl}^  distinct  from  the 
undergraduate  instruction  in  the  School  and  is  arranged  in  courses 
lasting  about  eight  weeks  each  and  designed  to  accommodate  practi- 
tioners whose  residence  is  necessarily  brief.  Certificates  of  attendance 
are  issued  to  those  who  have  taken  these  courses.  The  School  ofl[ers 
summer  instruction  of  a  nature  particularly  suited  for  graduates  whose 
opportunities  for  study  have  not  been  great,  or  who  have  had  no 
chances  to  profit  by  hospital  practice.  The  summer  courses  are 
clinical  in  character  and  are  given  in  hospitals  and  dispensaries  by 
the  surgeons  on  duty  in  them,  and  in  the  School  laboratories  by  the 
officers  in  charge.  Details  regarding  any  of  the  instruction  offered 
by  the  School  may  be  obtained  from  the  Dean  or  the  Secretary  of  the 
Medical  School,  Boylston  Street,  Boston. 


35 


THE   DENTAL   SCHOOL. 

Being  closely  connected  with  the  Medical  School  and  dependent 
upon  hospital  and  infirmary  work  to  be  secured  only  in  the  midst 
of  a  large  city,  the  Dental  School  is  situated  in  Boston.  It  occu- 
pies the  building  on  North  Grove  Street  for  many  years  used  by 
the  Medical  School.  To  enter  the  School  a  candidate  who  has 
not  passed  an  examination  for  admission  to  the  College  or  the 
Scientific  School  of  the  University,  or  who  has  not  already  taken  a 
degree  in  arts,  letters,  science,  or  medicine,  must  pass  an  examination 
in  English,  physics,  and  either  Latin,  French,  German,  algebra,  or 
plane  geometry.  Admission  to  advanced  standing  is  granted  upon 
satisfactory  grounds. 

The  course  for  the  degree  of  the  Doctor  of  Dental  Medicine  covers 
three  years,  the  first  being  identical  with  that  in  the  Medical  School. 
During  the  remaining  years  instruction  is  given  in  dental  pathology, 
oral  anatomy  and  physiology,  neurology,  dental  chemistry,  dental 
materia  medica  and  therapeutics,  surgery  and  surgical  pathology, 
and  operative  and  mechanical  dentistry.  Twenty-eight  persons  take 
part  in  the  instruction  of  the  School,  which  is  thorough  and  exhaust- 
ive. No  one  can  secure  the  degree  who  has  not  studied  medicine  or 
dentistry  three  full  years  and  passed  the  required  examinations  of 
the  School.  The  Infirmary  practice  afi:"orded  by  the  School  is  inval- 
uable. 

The  diploma  of  the  School  is  accepted  by  the  English  Board  of 
Registration  under  the  Dental  Act,  so  that  graduates  of  the  School 
who  are  not  British  subjects  can  practice  dentistry  in  Great  Britain 
without  further  examination.  Board  and  lodging  are  obtainable  in 
Boston  at  from  five  dollars  a  week  upwards. 


36 


THE   SCHOOL   OF  VETERINARY   MEDICINE. 

The  School  of  Veterinary  Medicine  was  founded  in  1882.  It  has 
already  rendered  a- service  to  the  country  in  being  among  the  first  to 
introduce  a  graded  course  of  study  of  the  kind  long  in  force  in  the 
best  European  schools.  This  change  may  be  said  to  have  put  the 
modern  science  of  veterinary  medicine  upon  a  secure  foundation  in 
America. 

Entrance  to  its  classes  is  guarded  by  admission  examinations  in 
English,  arithmetic,  and  in  either  French,  German,  Latin,  algebra, 
plane  geometry,  or  zoology. 

Its  course  extends  over  three  years  of  about  nine  months  each ;  its 
instructors  number  twenty-two  persons  ;  and  where  the  subjects  are 
common  to  all  branches  of  medicine,  the  instructors  in  them  are 
drawn  from  among  the  members  of  the  Medical  Faculty  of  the  Uni- 
versity. The  School  has  no  scholarships.  In  order  to  be  in  the 
centre  of  a  large  and  busy  community,  the  School  and  its  Hospital 
are  situated  in  Boston,  where,  in  buildings  erected  particularly  for  its 
uses,  all  purely  veterinary  instruction  is  given.  The  School  building 
contains  a  lecture-room  seating  one  hundred  persons  ;  a  reading- 
room  ;  a  dissecting-room ;  and  a  museum.  Adjoining  is  a  Hospital 
building  with  accommodations  for  thirty-eight  horses  and  a  large 
number  of  dogs  ;  this  space  is  divided  into  three  wards.  The  build- 
ing includes  also  a  large  operating-room,  a  pharmacy,  and  a  forge 
where  horses  are  shod. 

The  department,  although  still  comparative^  small  in  numbers,  is 
effectively  constituted  and  offers  opportunities  for  the  study  of  both 
the  theory  and  practice  of  veterinary  medicine  which,  it  is  believed, 
are  as  yet  unapproached  in  the  United  States. 


37 


THE   BUSSEY    INSTITUTION. 

The  School  of  Agriculture  and  Horticulture  is  situated  about  five 
miles  from  the  heart  of  the  city  on  a  farm  of  200  acres  in  Jamaica 
Plain,  a  rural  portion  of  the  extended  municipalit}'  of  Boston.  In- 
struction is  given  in  Agriculture,  Useful  and  Ornamental  Gardening 
and  Stock-Raising,  and  in  Botany,  Chemistry,  and  Entomology  as 
applied  to  those  arts.  The  students  of  the  School  include  persons 
intending  to  become  landscape  gardeners,  florists,  gardeners,  and 
managers  or  stewards  of  large  farms  or  estates.  The  admission 
requirements  are  nominal  as  regards  students  who  do  not  purpose 
to  become  candidates  for  a  degree.  If  the  degree  of  Bachelor  of 
Agricultural  Science  is  desired,  the  candidate  must  have  spent  one 
year  at  the  Lawrence  Scientific  School  or  give  evidence  of  having 
taken  its  equivalent  elsewhere.  He  must  then  stud}'  one  year  at  the 
Bussey  Institution  and  subsequently  pursue  at  least  one  year  of  ad- 
vanced study  there  or  in  other  departments  of  the  University  and  pass 
examinations  to  determine  the  excellence  of  his  work.  The  tuition- 
fee  of  $150  is  remitted  in  favor  of  students  of  limited  means  and  a 
few  students  are  permitted  to  work  for  their  board.  Those  who  pay 
the  full  fee  maj-  take  courses  in  other  departments  of  the  University 
free  of  charge  and  enjoy  the  library  and  other  privileges  open  to 
students  in  the  Cambridge  departments.  The  small  number  of  stu- 
dents at  this  School  assures  to  all  the  most  careful  personal  attention. 


38 


THE   SUMMER   SCHOOLS. 

A  week  or  more  after  Commencement  and  the  departure  of  the 
great  body  of  students,  a  number  of  short  courses  or  schools  are 
opened  in  the  College  buildings  in  Cambridge  under  the  charge  of 
instructors  in  the  departments  of  Chemistry,  Physics,  Botany,  Geol- 
ogy, Bodily  Training,  etc.  These  courses  are  largely  attended  by 
teachers  in  colleges  and  secondary  schools  ;  college  students  who  are 
sufficiently  in  earnest  in  their  studies  to  give  half  of  their  vacation 
to  work,  and  other  persons  —  women  as  well  as  men  —  who  wish  to 
avail  themselves  of  the  opportunity  to  use  Harvard's  wealth  of  appa- 
ratus in  the  weeks  when  it  would  otherwise  be  idle.  The  schools  are 
gaining  in  numbers  from  year  to  year.  The  fees  are  small  and  the 
opportunities  for  individual  progress  under  competent  guidance  are 
excellent.  Detailed  circulars  about  these  schools  are  published  early 
everj^  spring  and  may  be  obtained  from  the  Secretary.  Each  course 
lasts  about  six  weeks,  and  occupies  the  whole  time  of  its  students 
during  that  period.  The  number  of  students  in  the  summer  schools 
of  1890  was  279. 

During  the  summer  of  189  lit  is  expected  that  the  following  courses 
will  be  given  :  — 

Four  courses  in  Chemistry  (Fundamental  principles  of  Chemistry, 
Qualitative  Analysis,  Quantitative  Analysis,  and  Organic  Chemistry)  ; 
courses  in  Experimental  Physics,  and  in  Botany  ;  Elementary  and 
advanced  courses  in  Geology ;  courses  in  Topography,  German, 
French,  and  Bodily  Training.  In  addition,  a  general  course  of  lect- 
ures on  methods  of  instruction  will  be  given  by  teachers  in  the  depart- 
ments represented  by  the  Schools. 

Board  and  lodging  are  obtainable  in  Cambridge  during  the  summer 
at  from  $5  to  $10  a  week. 

The  summer  courses  in  medicine  are  described  on  page  34. 


39 


THE  ASTRONOMICAL  OBSERVATORY. 

The  Observatory  is  situated  upon  a  small  hill  about  half  a  mile 
northwest  of  the  bulk  of  the  University  buildings.  Its  grounds 
embrace  7J  acres  and  contain  nine  buildings  belonging  to  this  depart- 
ment. The  main  building  includes  the  residence  of  the  Director,  the 
library,  various  computing  rooms,  the  15-inch  and  6-inch  equatorials 
and  8-inch  transit  circle.  One  of  the  smaller  buildings  contains  a 
photographic  laboratory  ;  the  others  contain  apparatus,  including  pho- 
tographic telescopes  of  the  respective  apertures  12,  11,  and  8  inches, 
and  a  reflector  28  inches  in  aperture.  Nearly  all  of  these  instruments 
are  in  constant  use,  two  of  the  photographic  telescopes  being  used 
throughout  the  whole  of  every  clear  night. 

In  addition  to  observations  conducted  in  Cambridge,  the  Observa- 
tory has  recently  been  maintaining  a  series  of  observations  in  South- 
ern California  and  in  Peru.  Additional  work  in  Peru  is  to  be  carried 
on  by  a  new  expedition.  The  work  undertaken  in  Peru  is  designed 
to  complete  investigations  begun  at  Cambridge-  by  extending  them  to 
the  parts  of  the  sky  invisible  at  northern  stations.  It  includes  pho- 
tometric measurements  of  the  light  of  the  stars,  photographic  charts 
of  their  places,  and  photographs  of  their  spectra. 

The  reduction  of  the  results  of  the  observations  in  Cambridge, 
California,  and  Peru  employs  a  force  of  from  25  to  30  persons  at  the 
Cambridge  buildings,  and  it  is  in  computation  and  work  upon  photo- 
graphic plates  as  well  as  in  certain  kinds  of  observing  that  approved 
students  are  sometimes  employed  under  Professor  Pickering's  direc- 
tion. Competent  students  needing  pecuniary  aid  are  given  allowances 
varying  from  $200  to  $500  a  year  for  their  services,  but  the  work  for 
which  they  are  paid  does  not  afford  much  scientific  training  nor  leave 
much  time  for  other  study. 


40 


THE   UNIVERSITY  LIBRARY. 

The  University  Library  contains  376,200  volumes  and  —  ap- 
proximately —  an  equal  number  of  pamphlets.  It  is  the  largest 
of  the  university  libraries  of  the  country.  Its  increase  is  rapid. 
In  1879  it  gained  10,389  volumes  ;  in  1885,  14,558  ;  in  1888,  16,468. 
It  is  not  all  grouped  in  Gore  Hall,  its  main  building ;  volumes 
relating  to  professional  work  being  placed  in  the  Professional 
School  buildings,  while  many  in  immediate  demand  in  the  classical 
department,  the  philosophical  department,  the  historical  department, 
and  similar  centres  of  activity  are  placed  within  easy  reach  of  the 
class-rooms  of  those  departments.  The  Library  is  conducted  upon 
the  most  modern  and  approved  methods,  and  its  primary  aim  is  to 
meet  all  immediate  demands  in  the  shortest  possible  time.  It  is 
catalogued  by  cards  —  first  by  authors,  second  by  subjects.  Delivery, 
considering  the  size  of  the  collection  and  its  steady  and  rapid  growth, 
is  singularly  prompt.  The  possession  of  ample  funds  for  the  pur- 
chase of  new  books  as  fast  as  needed  for  effective  instruction  is  one 
of  the  strongest  features  of  the  Library.  Its  total  annual  expendi- 
tures closely  approach  $50,000.  The  efficiency  of  the  Library  man- 
agement is  shown  by  the  number  of  those  who  use  it  and  by  the 
number  of  volumes  lent.  In  1888-89  over  80,000  volumes  were  lent 
to  individuals.  Of  the  Seniors  in  College  in  the  same  year,  97% 
used  the  Library  as  borrowers;  of  Juniors,  99%  ;  and  other  classes 
to  a  less  degree.  Fifteen  years  ago  only  57%  of  students  in  College 
used  the  Library  as  borrowers.  The  elective  system  deserves  a  part 
of  the  credit  for  this  increased  use  of  original  authorities.  The  mere 
note-taking  or  text-book  studying  student  is  now  the  exception  where 
he  used  to  be  the  rule. 

The  following  table  shows  the  distribution  of  bound  volumes  in  the 
several  libraries  :  — 

Gore  Hall 282,000 

Lawrence  Scientific  School 2,700 

Bussey  Institution  (Jamaica  Plain) 3,100 

PhiUips  Library  (Observatory) 6,800 

Botanic  Garden  (Herbarium  Library)      ....  5,500 

Law  School 25,300 

Divinity  School 21,000 

Medical  School  (Boston)        2,000 

Museum  of  Comparative  Zoology 21,300 

Peabody  Museum 1,100 

Six  laboratory  and  eleven  class-room  libraries      .  4,800 

376,200 


41 


THE   LABORATORIES. 

The  principal  laboratories  in  Cambridge  are  the  Boylston  Chemical 
Laboratory,  built  in  1857  and  enlarged  in  1870  ;  the  Jefferson  Phys- 
ical Laboratory,  completed  in  1884  at  a  cost  of  $115,000  ;  and  the 
laboratories  in  the  University  Museum  building,  which  include  ample 
and  separate  accommodations  for  the  departments  of  Zoology,  Paleon- 
tology, Geolog}',  Geography,  Petrography,  Mineralogy,  and  Botany. 
The  portion  of  the  Museum  building  occupied  by  the  laboratories  and 
lecture-rooms  of  these  departments  has  a  floor  space  of  over  an  acre. 
The  Peabody  Museum  contains  a  laboratory  for  anthropological  and 
archaeological  research.  Boylston  Hall  now  contains  five  large  chem- 
ical laboratories  and  a  number  of  private  rooms  for  instructors.  The 
largest  working-room  has  places  for  100  students.  It  is  especially 
devoted  to  qualitative  and  descriptive  work.  That  next  in  size  has 
64  places.  The  transfer  from  Boylston  Hall  to  the  University  Museum 
of  the  Mineralogical  Collection  renders  it  possible  to  provide  addi- 
tional space  for  laboratories  and  lecture-rooms  as  well  as  to  make 
existing  rooms  more  convenient.  The  Jefferson  Physical  Laboratory 
is  four  stories  high  and  210  feet  long.  It  has  the  most  ample  accom- 
modations for  both  large  and  small  classes,  and  for  individual  work, 
free  from  interruption.  In  the  basement  and  first  story  stone  tables 
resting  upon  separate  columns  of  masonry  furnish  firm  support  for 
instruments  in  use.  In  the  western  end  of  the  building  a  large  rec- 
tangular tower  stands  on  an  independent  foundation  and  has  no 
contact  with  surrounding  rooms.  In  it  are  conducted  experiments 
requiring  extraordinary  stability  or  a  great  height  —  as  for  example, 
in  Foucault's  pendulum  experiment.  By  a  simple  device  nearly 
the  entire  length  of  the  building  may  be  used  in  experiments  for 
testing  the  velocity  of  light.  In  the  wing  where  magnetic  experi- 
ments are  tried  there  is  no  iron  in  the  wood- work  or  masonry  of  the 
building.  New  apparatus  is  procured  and  the  general  running  ex- 
penses of  this  Laboratory  are  in  large  part  paid  from  a  permanent 
income  derived  from  invested  funds. 

The  laboratories  of  the  Medical,  Dental,  and  Veterinary  Schools, 
and  the  School  of  Agriculture  and  Horticulture,  are  of  a  size  equal 
to  the  needs  of  those  departments.  The  year  1889-90  saw  the  com- 
pletion, at  a  cost  of  $35,000,  of  the  Sears  Laboratories  for  patholog^^ 
and  bacteriology.  They  form  an  important  portion  of  the  equipment 
of  the  Medical  School. 


42 


THE   MUSEUMS. 

The  magnitude  of  the  museums  of  the  University  is  illustrated  by 
the  fact  that  the  University  Museum  alone  contains  four  acres  of 
floor  space.  It  includes  the  Museum  of  Comparative  Zoology,  Natural 
Histor}?^  Laboratories  of  Zoology,  Paleontology,  Geology,  and  Geog- 
raphy, and  the  Museums  of  Mineralogy  and  Botany.  The  portion 
of  the  building  devoted  to  Comparative  Zoology  and  the  laboratories 
named  cost  $450,000.  The  section  occupied  by  the  Botanical  Museum 
cost  $75,000  and  that  occupied  by  the  Mineralogical  Museum  $43,427. 

The  original  scheme  for  this  Museum  was  proposed  by  Professor 
Louis  Agassiz  in  1859.  Its  realization  is  in  great  part  the  work  of 
his  son  Alexander  Agassiz,  the  present  Curator  of  the  Museum. 

In  an  adjoining  building,  having  a  floor  area  of  29,828  square  feet 
(not  including  basement  and  attic) ,  are  the  Peabody  Museum  of 
American  Archaeology  and  Ethnology  and  the  Semitic  Museum. 
The  latter  will  in  time  be  removed  to  other  quarters.  The  Fine  Arts 
collections  are  in  part  in  the  rooms  of  the  department  of  Fine  Arts 
in  Sever  Hall  and  in  part  in  the  Museum  of  Fine  Arts,  Copley  Sq., 
Boston.  The  collection  of  coins  and  medals  belonging  to  the  Uni- 
versity is  kept  in  Gore  Hall.  The  Anatomical  Museum  is  placed  in 
the  Medical  School  building  on  Boylston  St.,  Boston.  The  Museum 
of  the  Dental  School  is  in  the  School  building  on  North  Grove  St., 
and  that  of  the  School  of  Veterinary  Medicine  is  in  the  Veterinary 
Hospital  building  on  Village  St.,  Boston.  The  Arboretum  Museum 
is  located  in  the  "  Dwight  House  "  in  Brookline.  The  actual  cost  of 
the  collections  in  the  Museum  of  Comparative  Zoology  has  been  over 
$350,000.  The  collections  are  in  part  open  to  the  public.  The  first 
of  the  exhibition-rooms  open  to  the  public  is  the  Synoptic  Room,  in 
which  the  entire  animal  kingdom  is  summarized  in  a  compact  collec- 
tion of  distinctive  types.  Beyond  this  are  the  systematic  collections 
of  Mammals,  Birds,  Reptiles,  Fishes,  Mollusks,  Crustacea  and  In- 
sects, Radiates,  Sponges,  and  Protozoa.  Finally,  there  are  the  rooms 
devoted  to  faunal  areas,  including  those  of  North  and  South  America, 
Europe,  the  Indo-Asiatic,  the  African,  the  Australian,  and  the  At- 
lantic. The  larger  parts  of  the  collection  are  not  open  to  the  public, 
but  are  in  constant  use  by  officers  or  competent  students  of  the 
University  engaged  in  research. 

The  collections  in  the  Botanical  Museum  are  not  fully  arranged 
and  are  open  to  the  public  only  in  part.  When  completed,  the  collec- 
tions will  be  found  to  be  economic  in  theory,  containing,  for  example. 


43 

woods,  fruits,  fibres,  etc.,  as  well  as  a  unique  and  beautiful  series  of 
glass  models  of  flowers. 

Tlie  Mineralogical  Collections  are  in  part  open  to  the  public.  The 
public  portions  —  about  one  half  in  amount  —  are  large  enough  fully 
to  illustrate  the  extent,  beauty,  and  variety  of  the  mineral  kingdom. 
Some  portions  are.S3^stematic  in  arrangement;  others  are  grouped  to 
illustrate  striking  characteristics  of  minerals  —  lustre,  for  example. 
The  collection  of  meteorites  is  one  of  the  finest  in  existence.  The 
portion  of  the  collections  not  open  to  the  public  consist  of  systematic 
series  grouped  for  specific  and  comparative  study,  and  duplicates  and 
class-room  material  continually  being  used  and  replaced."  The  value 
of  this  collection  is  great.  The  meteorites  alone  represent  $30,000  ; 
the  whole  collection,  from  $100,000  to  $150,000. 

The  Peabody  Museum  is  open  to  the  public.  It  contains  large 
archaeological  and  ethnological  collections  obtained  by  systematic 
and  thorough  explorations  of  burial-places,  caves,  shell-heaps,  village- 
sites,  mounds,  and  ruins  in  manj^  parts  of  North,  Central,  and  South 
America,  as  well  as  by  extensive  examinations  of  gravel  beds,  peat 
bogs,  and  river  and  other  deposits  of  various  geological  ages.  By 
the  arrangement  in  the  Museum  of  these  special  collections  in  their 
geographical  sequence,  each  tells  its  own  story  in  all  its  details. 

For  a  comparative  study  of  the  archaeology  and  ethnology  of  other 
parts  of  the  world  two  rooms  are  devoted  to  collections  arranged 
ethnograpliicalh^  There  is  also  a  large  anthropological  collection, 
including  over  two  thousand  human  crania  and  man}'  more  or  less 
complete  skeletons. 

The  Semitic  Museum,  founded  by  Mr.  Jacob  H.  Schiif  in  1889, 
occupies  temporary  quarters  in  the  new  part  of  the  Peabody  Museum. 
Its  objects  are  to  furnish  materials  for  illustration  of  the  Semitic  in- 
struction given  in  the  University  and  for  original  investigation,  and 
also  to  show  to  the  general  public  the  place  which  belongs  to  the 
Semites  in  the  history  of  culture.  The  collection  embraces  casts  of 
many  of  the  most  interesting  Semitic  monuments  in  the  British 
Museum,  the  Louvre,  and  the  Berlin  Museum.  Among  these  are 
Assyrian  bas-reliefs  from  Nineveh  and  Kalah  ;  Babylonian  statues 
from  Tello  ;  and  Phoenician,  Hebrew,  Moabite,  Arabic,  Punic,  Hittite, 
and  Persian  monuments,  bas-reliefs,  and  inscriptions.  It  contains 
also  manuscripts,  Arabic,  Hebrew,  and  Syriac,  and  a  large  number 
of  photographs  illustrating  ancient  and  modern  Semitic  life,  art,  and 
scenery.  There  are  many  original  clay  tablets  from  Babylon,  some 
of  which  are  of  great  interest,  and  also  Semitic  coins  and  other 
objects  illustrating  the  life  of  the  people.  It  is  intended  to  make  the 
collection  as  complete  as  possible  in  material  from  Palestine  illus- 
trating Hebrew  history.    The  Museum  will  be  opened  in  April,  1891. 


u 


BOTANIC   GAKDEN,  HEEBARIA,  AND  ARBORETUM. 

The  Botanic  Garden  and  greenhouses  occupy  about  seven  acres  of 
land  adjoining  the  Observatory  grounds.  About  6000  species  of 
flowering  plants  are  grown  for  educationaL  purposes,  supplying  stu- 
dents of  Botany  who  are  members  of  the  University  with  abundant 
material  for  determination  or  investigation.  The  Botanical  library 
of  9000  volumes  and  pamphlets  and  the  University  Herbarium  are 
contained  in  one  of  the  buildings  belonging  to  the  Garden.  The  Her- 
barium contains  several  hundred  thousand  specimens  which  are  open, 
under  the  direction  of  the  Curator,  to  qualified  and  properly  registered 
students.  The  accessions  to  the  Herbarium  in  1889-90  illustrate  the 
direction  and  the  rapidity  of  its  growth.  They  included  850  speci- 
mens from  Northern  Mexico,  embracing  many  new  and  little-known 
species  ;  575  from  Canada  ;  600  from  Porto  Rico  ;  670  from  Bolivia  ; 
700  through  the  Director  of  the  Kew  Gardens,  mainly  from  China, 
Tasmania,  and  Brazil ;  126  from  Arabia  Felix ;  300  from  South 
Africa ;  240  from  Australia  ;  the  entire  Thomas  P.  James  collection 
of  mosses,  and  a  large  part  of  the  George  Thurber  collections. 

The  Herbarium  of  Cryptogamic  Botany  is  placed  in  the  University 
Museum  in  connection  with  the  Botanical  Museum.  It  contains  sev- 
eral hundred  thousand  specimens,  including  the  Tuckerman  collection 
of  lichens,  having  about  75,000  specimens  ;  the  Curtis  collection  of 
fungi,  about  equal  in  magnitude  ;  and  the  Farlow  collection  of  algae, 
lichens,  and  fungi.  Competent  students  who  are  not  members  of  the 
University  may  obtain  permission  to  use  the  Herbarium  under  proper 
supervision. 

The  Arnold  Arboretum  occupies  a  portion  of  the  Bussey  Farm, 
160  acres  in  extent,  in  that  part  of  Boston  known  as  West  Roxbury. 
It  was  founded  for  the  purpose  of  scientific  research  and  experiment 
in  Arboriculture,  Forestry,  and  Dendrology,  and  as  an  out-door 
museum  of  trees  and  shrubs  suited  to  the  climate  of  Massachusetts. 
The  living  collections  are  supplemented  by  others  in  the  Herbarium 
and  Museum  which  are  temporarily  placed  in  the  "  D wight  House" 
in  Brookline.  Any  one  properly  qualified  to  pursue  the  study  of 
practical  arboriculture  or  forestry  may  be  admitted  to  the  Arboretum 
as  a  student.  Details  are  obtainable  from  the.  Director,  Professor 
Charles  S.  Sargent,  Brookline,  Mass. 


45 


THE  EELIGIOUS  EXERCISES  OF  THE  UNIVERSITY. 

Harvard  University  is  iu  the  broadest  possible  sense  unsectarian. 
Its  officers,  graduates,  and  students  include  persons  of  every  shade 
of  belief.  All  its  religious  exercises  are  voluntary.  Compulsory 
attendance  at  morning  prayers  was  abolished  in  1886,  and  the 
effect  of  the  change  has  been  good.  The  regular  services  are  held 
on  Sunday  evenings,  every  week-day  morning  in  term-time  between 
the  breakfast  hour  and  the  beginning  of  lectures,  and  on  Thursday 
afternoons  during  the  winter.  These  services  are  conducted  by  the 
Plummer  Professor  of  Christian  Morals,  assisted  from  time  to  time 
by  five  Preachers  to  the  University  who  are  appointed  annually  by 
the  Governing  Boards.  Among  these  preachers  have  been  Rev. 
Phillips  Brooks,  D.D.,  Rev.  Edward  Everett  Hale,  D.D.,  Rev. 
Lyman  Abbott,  D.D.,  and  other  clergymen  of  conspicuous  ability. 
Every  day  during  term-time  the  Preacher  to  the  University  con- 
ducting services  for  the  time  being  receives,  at  stated  hours, 
members  of  the  University  who  desire  advice  or  aid.  The  many 
hours  occupied  by  these  interviews  are  counted  by  both  parties 
to  them  as  productive  of  great  and  lasting  good.  A  portion  of 
the  time  the  Sunday  evening  services  are  conducted  by  invited 
clergymen  from  various  parts  of  the  country,  who  are  chosen  on 
account  of  their  recognized  leadership  in  their  localities  and  de- 
nominations. Among  those  holding  these  services  during  the  past 
few  years  have  been  the  Rev.  Dr.  McCosh  of  Princeton,  N.  J.,  Rev. 
Dr.  W.  R.  Huntington  of  New  York,  Rev.  Dr.  Hunger  of  New 
Haven,  Rt.  Rev.  H.  C.  Potter  of  New  York,  Rev.  Dr.  Fisher  of  New 
Haven,  Rev.  President  Hyde  of  Brunswick,  Rev.  Dr.  McVickar  of 
Philadelphia,  Rev.  Professor  Tucker  of  Andover,  Rt.  Rev.  T.  U. 
Dudley  of  Kentucky,  Rev.  President  Andrews  of  Providence,  Pro- 
fessor Henry  Drummond  of  Glasgow,  and  Mr.  Moody  the  evangelist. 

The  Preachers  to  the  University  publish  a  brief  pamphlet  describ- 
ing the  religious  work  of  the  year  which  may  be  obtained  on  applica- 
tion. It  bears  witness  to  the  fact  that  religious  life  in  the  University 
is  healthy  and  active. 

In  the  Harvard  Divinity  School  weekly  debates  and  conferences 
are  held  on  Wednesday  afternoons,  and  preaching  services  on  Friday 
evenings. 

During  the  current  academic  year  a  series  of  Tuesday  evening 
College  Conferences  on  the  literary,  ethical,  and  religious  aspects  of 
the  Bible  are  being  held.     Among  the  announced  subjects  are  the  fol- 


46 

lowing:  "The  Literary  Aspect  of  the  English  Bible,"  Professor 
Kittredge  ;  "The  Bible  and  the  Sacred  Books  of  the  East,"  Pro- 
fessor Everett;  "The  Bible  in  its  relation  to  Modern  Problems," 
Rev.  Lyman  Abbott ;  "  The  Development  of  the  Hebrew  Religion," 
Professor  Toy. 

Among  the  subjects  of  the  Conferences  in  1888  and  1889  were  the 
following:  "College  Responsibility,"  Rev.  Phillips  Brooks,  D.D.  ; 
"College  Public  Opinion,"  President  Eliot;  "The  Recovery  of 
Religious  Enthusiasm,"  Rev.  Professor  Tucker  of  Andover ;  "The 
Belief  in  Immortality,"  Rev.  Professor  Everett;  "Public  Life," 
Hon.  Theo.  Roosevelt  of  New  York;  "Problems  of  Charity  in  a 
Large  City,"  A.  T.  White,  Esq.,  of  Brooklyn,  N.  Y.  ;  and  a  series 
of  addresses  on  "  The  Choice  of  a  Profession"  by  eminent  members 
of  the  various  learned  professions. 

The  religious  societies  of  the  University  are  the  Harvard  Y.M.C. A. 
(formerly  known  as  the  Society  of  Christian  Brethren)  and  the  St. 
Paul's  Society.  Both  hold  weekly  meetings  and  have  numerous 
members.  Many  members  of  the  Universit}^  engage  actively  in 
charity  work  in  Boston  and  Cambridge,  fields  in  which  ample  oppor- 
tunity is  offered  for  effort  of  this  kind. 

There  are  in  Cambridge  or  its  immediate  vicinity  theological  semi- 
naries of  at  least  five  of  the  leading  evangelical  denominations. 

In  addition  to  the  opportunities  for  voluntary  worship  in  the 
University  Chapel,  seats  are  provided  for  students,  at  the  expense 
of  the  College,  in  many  churches  of  diff'erent  denominations  situated 
near  the  College  buildings. 


47 


THE   LECTURE-ROOMS   AND   THEIR  USES. 

All  the  Professional  Schools  of  the  University  have-  separate 
buildings  devoted  exclusively  to  their  own  uses,  and  their  buildings 
have  ample  lecture-room  accommodations.  The  Lawrence  Scientific 
School  has  a  building  of  its  own  containing  17  rooms.  Its  stu- 
dents also  work  much  of  their  time  in  the  laboratories  and  museums 
already  described  in  detail.  The  College  and  Graduate  School 
together  occupy  lecture-rooms  in  nine  buildings,  80  rooms  in  all 
being  in  constant  use.  A  few  of  these  rooms  seat  between  three  and 
four  hundred  students  at  once,  but  most  of  them  are  adapted  to 
classes  of  20,  40,  70,  or  100  each.  Small  classes  are  one  feature  of 
the  elective  system.  The  largest  of  the  lecture-halls  of  the  University 
is  Sanders  Theatre,  which  seats  1400  persons.  The  Commencement- 
Day  exercises  are  held  in  it,  as  well  as  many  evening  concerts, 
lectures,  and  readings. 

The  number  of  evening  lectures,  seminary  meetings,  conferences, 
concerts,  and  readings  is  large,  students  often  having  their  choice, 
in  a  single  evening,  of  four  or  five  such  auxiliaries  to  regular  work. 
The  lecturers,  while  often  members  of  one  of  the  University  Facul- 
ties, are  quite  as  likely  to  be  distinguished  visitors  from  abroad  or 
from  some  other  centre  of  American  culture.  Most  of  the  speakers 
come  as  the  guests  of  student  societies  like  the  Classical  Club,  the 
Historical  Society,  the  Deutscher  Verein,  or  the  Total  Abstinence 
League ;  but  the  University  often  invites  eminent  scholars  to  deliver 
courses  of  public  lectures,  as  for  example,  Professor  Lanciani  in 
1886  and  Hon.  David  A.  Wells  in  1889.  A  series  of  eight  instru- 
mental concerts  is  given  each  winter,  in  Sanders  Theatre,  by  the 
Boston  Symphony  Orchestra.  The  best  music  is  performed  at  these 
concerts.  During  the  winter  of  1889-90  the  number  of  public  evening 
lectures  and  similar  appointments  in  the  University  lecture-rooms 
was  over  a  hundred,  the  audiences  in  some  instances  exceeding  a 
thousand. 


48 


THE   ATHLETIC  BUILDINGS   AND   FIELDS. 

The  University  has  four  buildings  devoted  wholly  to  athletic  pur- 
poses—  the  Hemenway  Gymnasium,  the  Carey  Athletic  Building, 
the  University  Boat  House,  and  the  Weld  Boat  House.  The  Hem- 
enway Gymnasium,  built  in  1879,  has  —  allowing  for  the  reasonable 
coming  and  going  of  individuals  —  accommodations  for  between  2000 
and  3000  students.  As  regards  size,  strength,  and  variety  of  its 
apparatus  and  completeness  of  its  appointments,  the  Gymnasium 
supplies  every  desire  of  the  indoor  athlete.  For  members  of  the 
University  and  class  crews,  nines  and  elevens,  the  Carey  Athletic 
Building,  having  a  floor  area  of  7848  square  feet,  gives  peculiar 
accommodations.  For  the  crews  there  is  a  tank  containing  a  fixed 
boat,  around  which  passes  a  current  of  water.  For  the  nines 
there  are  rooms  in  which  indoor  practice  in  pitching  and  batting  is 
made  easy.  Early  in  the  autumn  the  elevens  use  a  room  with  an 
earth  floor,  which  gives  opportunities  for  drill  in  dodging,  tackling, 
and  passing  the  ball.  The  same  room  is  available  for  practice  in 
jumping,  vaulting,  and  similar  exercises.  Of  the  two  boat-houses, 
the  University  is  for  the  regular  crews,  and  is  arranged  to  hold  their 
long  shells  used  in  races.  Its  floor  space  is  6893  square  feet.  The 
Weld  Boat  House  is  for  the  use  of  any  students  who  enjoy  rowing. 
It  contains  boats  of  various  kinds  sufficient  for  300  persons.  All 
students  using  the  athletic  buildings  are  closely  supervised  and 
allowed  to  take  only  proper  kinds  and  amounts  of  exercise.  The 
Director  of  the  Gymnasium  is  a  physician  and  an  expert  in  physical 
development.  The  outdoor  sports  of  the  students  requiring  fields 
for  play  are  accommodated  on  Jarvis  Field  (five  acres),  Holmes 
Field  (five  acres),  Norton  Field  (seven  acres),  and  the  Soldier's  Field 
(twenty-seven  acres) .  The  latter  is  not  yet  turfed,  but  has  sufficient 
area  to  meet  the  demands  of  a  very  large  number  of  students.  The 
athletic  fields  now  in  use  have  stands  and  benches  erected  around 
them  sufficient  to  seat  about  6000  persons. 


41) 


PEIZES. 

The  money  prizes  offered  aDnually  in  the  various  departments  of 
the  University  amount  to  $2755.     They  are  as  follows  :  — 

Nine  Bowdoin  prizes,  varying  from  $50  to  $100  each,  for  disserta- 
tions upon  announced  economic,  classical,  or  scientific  subjects,  or 
for  translations  of  set  passages  of  English  into  Latin  or  Greek  prose. 
These  are  open  wholly  or  in  part  to  students  in  the  Graduate  School, 
the  College,  the  Scientific  School,  and  other  parts  of  the  University. 

Five  Boylston  prizes,  three  of  $45  each  and  two  of  $60  each,  for 
excellence  in  elocution,  open  to  Seniors  and  Juniors  in  the  College. 

The  Sargent  prize  of  $100,  for  the  best  metrical  translation  of  an 
ode  of  Horace,  open  to  students  in  the  undergraduate  department. 

The  Sumner  prize  of  $100,  for  the  best  dissertation  on  a  subject 
connected  with  the  topic  of  Universal  Peace,  open  to  all  departments. 

The  Toppan  prize  of  $150,  for  the  best  essay  on  a  selected  subject 
in  Political  Science,  open  to  graduates  of  three  years'  standing  and 
to  students  in  the  Graduate  and  Professional  Schools. 

The  Chauncey  Wright  prize  of  $25,  for  the  best  mathematical  thesis 
on  an  announced  subject,  open  to  Juniors,  Seniors,  and  graduates. 

The  Dante  prize  of  SlOO,  for  the  best  essay  on  a  subject  drawn 
from  the  life  or  works  of  Dante,  open  to  students  in  any  department 
and  to  graduates  of  not  more  than  three  years'  standing. 

The  George  B.  Sohier  prize  of  $250,  for  the  best  thesis  presented 
by  an  approved  candidate  for  Honors  in  English  or  modern  literature. 

The  Paine  prizes,  two  of  $100  each,  for  the  best  essays  by  any 
students  of  the  University  on  the  ethical  aspect  of  social  questions ; 
for  example,  labor  problems,  productive  cooperation,  etc. 

The  Semitic  prizes,  two  of  $100  each,  open  to  students  in  the 
Semitic  Languages. 

The  Harvard  Law  School  Association  prize  of  $100,  for  the  best 
essay  upon  a  selected  subject  in  law,  open  to  third-year  students  in 
the  Law  School. 

The  Boylston  Medical  prizes,  two  prizes  of  one  or  two  hundred 
dollars  each,  upon  announced  subjects  in  medical  science,  open  to 
public  competition. 

The  Porter  prize  of  $50,  for  the  best  dissection  deserving  the 
award  illustrative  of  surgical  anatomy,  open  to  members  of  the  Med- 
ical School  and  graduates  of  not  more  than  five  years'  standing. 

The  Otology  prize  of  $25,  for  the  best  preparation  illustrating  the 
osseous  anatomy  of  the  ear,  or  for  the  best  thesis  showing  original 
work  on  an  otological  subject,  open  to  third-year  students  in  .the 
Medical  School. 


50 


CONCLUSION. 

This  brief  surve}^  has  shown  that  Harvard  University  with  its  large 
corps  of  instructors  ;  its  collections  of  books,  apparatus,  and  sci- 
entific material ;  its  activity  in  the  general  advancement  and  diffusion 
of  knowledge  ;  its  ability  and  readiness  to  aid  the  poor  but  promising 
student ;  its  hospitality  towards  all  scholars,  no  matter  what  their 
race  or  creed,  is  in  fact  a  true  University. 

Although  age  is  too  apt  to  breed  unwise  conservatism,  this  Univer- 
sity is  more  frequently  assailed  for  its  spirit  of  progress,  and  its 
willingness  to  break  with  precedent  for  the  sake  of  truth,  than  it  is 
for  its  attachment  to  venerable  tradition.  It  has  done  its  part  in 
making  the  degree  of  Bachelor  of  Arts  a  broader  and  a  higher 
title.  It  has  increased  the  significance  of  the  degrees  of  Master  of 
Arts  and  Doctor  of  Philosophy,  and  it  has  been  prudent  in  its 
bestowal  of  honorary  degrees.  Having  for  twenty  years  steadily 
increased  the  severity  of  its  requirements  for  admission  and  for 
graduation,  it  is  not  unwilling  to  permit  capable  students  to  compress 
somewhat  the  term  of  residence  ordinarily  required  for  the  degree  of 
Bachelor  of  Arts,  in  order  that  more  young  Americans  may  seek  the 
degree  of  Bachelor  of  Arts,  and  that  the  professional  degrees  and 
the  degrees  of  Master  of  Arts,  Doctor  of  Philosophy,  and  Doctor  of 
Science  may  be  taken  less  late  in  life  by  college  graduates.  Not  a 
few  who  are  able  to  meet  in  full  the  requirements  for  the  first  degree 
in  three  years  or  three  years  and  a  half  are  allowed  to  do  so.  All 
who  aim  to  become  teachers  are  encouraged  to  secure  either  the 
Master's  degree  or  the  degree  of  Doctor  of  Philosophy. 

In  1871  Harvard  University  included  1149  students  and  116  teach- 
ers. In  1891  it  includes  2271  students  and  242  teachers.  There 
is  reason  to  suppose  that  this  rate  of  increase  may  be  maintained. 
The  authorities  of  the  University  desire  it ;  the  alumni  are  believed 
to  be  ready  to  provide  such  additional  endowments  as  may  be  needed, 
and  the  public  is  alive  to  the  fact  that  more  is  to  be  gained  by  ex- 
panding an  existing  institution  of  merit  than  by  multiplying  poorly 
equipped  schools.  Harvard's  equipment  is  capable  of  serving  many 
more  advanced  students  than  now  use  it.  Such  students,  if  qualified 
for  advanced  work,  are  welcome  not  only  in  the  departments  of  Phi- 
lology, Literature,  Political  Science,  Mathematics,  and  Philosophy, 
but  also  in  the  scientific  work-shops  of  the  University  —  the  Observa- 
tory, the  Museums,  the  Herbaria,  and  the  experimental  rooms  of 
the  laboratories. 


51 


Table  of  Schools  and  Colleges  from  which  young  men  actually  entered 
Harvard  College  from  1881  to  1890  inclusive,  with  the  number 
that  entered  from  each  institution  in  each  year.  Special  students 
are  not  included.  An  asterisk  (*)  indicates  a  public  school,  a 
dagger  (t)  an  endowed  school. 


Acadia  College,  Wolfville,  Nova  Scotia  .  .  .  . 
fAdams  Academy,  Quincy 

Adelbert  College  of  W.  R.  Univ.,  Cleveland,  0.  . 

fAdelphi  Academy,  Brooklyn,  N.  Y 

fAlbany,  N.Y.,  Academy 

*Albany,  N.Y.,  High  School 

Albion  College,  Mich 

Alfred,  N.  Y.,  University 

Amherst  College 

Andover  Theological  Seminary 

*  Arlington,  Cotting  High  School 

Atlanta  University,  Georgia 

*Auburn,  Me.,  Edward  Little  High  School.    .    .    . 

*Auburn,  N.  Y.,  High  School 

*Augusta,  Me.,  Cony  High  School 

Augustana  College,  Rock  Island,  111 

fBarre  Academy 

Baugher's  Academy,  Hanover,  Pa 

Belmont  School,  Belmont,  Cal 

Belmont  School,  Bel-nont,  Mass 

Berkeley  Gymnasium,  San  Francisco,  Cal.    . 

Berkeley  School,  Boston 

Berkeley  School,  New  York 

Berkeley  School,  Providence,  R.  I 

fBerwick  Academy,  South  Berwick,  Me 

Bethany  College,  W.  Va 

Boston  College 

*Boston  English  High  School 

*Boston  Latin  School 

Boston  University 

Bowdoin  College,  Brunswick,  Me 

fBrackett  Academy,  Greenland,  N.  H 

*Bridgewater  High  School 

fBristol  Academy,  Taunton 

JBromfield  School,  Harvard 

*Brookfield  High  School 

*Brookline  High  School 

Brooklyn,  N.  Y.,  Latin  School 

Brown,  H.  IL,  Private  School,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 

Brown  University,  Providence,  R.  I 

Browne  &  Nichols,  Private  School,  Cambridge    . 

Bucknell  University,  Lewisburg,  Pa 

*Buffalo,  N.  Y.,  High  School 

BufPalo,  N.Y.,  Latin  School 

*Bufealo,  N.  Y.,  State  Normal  School 

fBurr  &  Burton  Seminary,  Manchester,  Vt.  .  .  . 
*Cambridge  Latin  School 


17 


11 


17 


19 


20 


11 


17 


11 


11 


14 


52 


oo 

00 

1— ( 

00 

00 

CO 

1 

c6 
oo 

i 

1 

Carleton  College,  Northfield,  Minn 

*Castine,  Me.,  High  School 

• 

1 

2 
2 

1 
1 

2 

2 
1 

2 
1 

1 

i 
2 

2 

1 
3 

i 

3 

i 

2 

2 

1 
3 

i 
1 

2 

i 

1 
1 

2 

2 

1 

1 

1 

1 

2 

1 
1 

1 

1 
1 
4 
1 

I 
1 

4 

5 
1 
1 
3 

2 
1 

2 

4 

1 

2 
1 

1 

1 
1 

3 

1 
1 

1 

8 

7 
3 

1 

1 
1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

Centre  College,  Danville,  Ky 

Chadwick  &  Pye,  Boys'  Prep.  Sch. ,  Brooklyn,  N.  Y. 

Charleston,  S   C,  College  of 

Charlier  Institute,  New  York 

i 
1 

3 
3 

2 

Chase,  R.  H.,  Private  School,  Philadelphia,  Pa.  . 
Chauncy  Hall  School,  Boston 

*Chelsea  High  School <    . 

*Chicago,  111.,  High  School 

Christian  College,  Monmouth,  Ore 

*Cincinnati,  0.,  Hughes  High  School 

*Cincinnati,  0.,  Woodward  High  School     .... 
Cleveland,  0.,  Academy 

^Cleveland,  0.,  Central  High  School 

*Cleveland,  0.,  West  High  School 

f Colby  Academy,  New  London,  N.  H 

Colby  University,  Waterville,  Me 

College  of  the  City  of  New  York 

College  of  Emporia,  Kan 

College  of  New  Jersey,  Princeton,  N.  J 

fCoUegiate  andPolytech.  Institute,  Brooklyn,  N.  Y. 
Colorado  College,  Colorado  Springs,  Colo.     .    .    . 
Columbia  College,  New  York 

Columbia  College  School  of  Mines,  New  York     . 

Columbian  University,  Washington,  D.  C.     ... 

*Concord  High  School 

Cornell  College,  Mt.  Vernon,  Iowa 

Cornell  University,  Ithaca,  N.  Y 

fCorning,  N.  Y.,  Free  Academy 

fCushing  Academy,  Ashburnham 

Cutler,  A.  H.,  Private  School,  New  York     .    .    . 

Cutler,  Edward  H.,  Private  School,  Newton     .    . 

Dalhousie  College,  Halifax,  N.  S 

Dartmouth  College,  Hanover,  N.  H 

Dearborn  Morgan  School,  Orange,  N.  J 

*Decatur,  111.,  High  School 

Delaware  College,  Newark,  Del 

1 
1 

4 
1 

Denison  University,  Granville,  0 

*Denver,  Colo.,  High  School 

fDerby  Academy,  Hingham 

Dickinson  College,  Carlisle,  Pa 

tDickinson  High  Sch.  &  Deerfield  Acad.,  Deerfield 
*Dorchester  High  School 

Drury  College,  Springfield,  Mo. 

fDummer  Academy,  South  Byfield •   . 

Dwight  School,  New  York 

fEast  Maine  Conference  Seminary,  Bucksport,  Me. 

Eayrs,  Wm.  N.,  Private  School,  Boston    .... 

*Elkhart,  Ind.,  High  School 

*Ellsworth,  Me.,  High  School 

Emerson  Institute,  Washington,  D.  C 

Eminence  College,  Ky 

Episcopal  Theological  School  at  Cambridge      .    . 

Eureka  College,  Eureka,  111 

*Everett  Iligli  School 

Everson,  ]).  S.,  Collegiate  School,  New  York 

53 


i 

i 

1 

i 

oo 

CO 

CO 

I— 1 

S8 

GO 

oo 

d 
1 

*Eall  River,  B.  M.  C.  Durfee  High  School     .    .    . 

Fish,  C.  E.,  Private  School,  Worcester  .    .    .    .    . 

risk  University,  Nashville,  Tenn 

*ritcliburg  High  School 

2 

• 

• 

3 

j 

19 

3 

1*7 

4 
1 

1 
23 

2 

1 

1 

1 
1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

2 

1 
1 

25 
1 

4 

2 

1 

2 
1 
19 

i 

1 

1 
1 

11 
1 
1 

3 

1 

15 
1 

3 
1 

1 

1 
9 

1 

1 

1 

5 

1 
1 

1 

3 

1 

5 

1 

17 

2 

1 

1 
2 

15 

1 
2 

1 
2 

1 

Fort  Hill  School,  Rochester,  N.  Y 

*Fort  Wayne,  Ind.,  Central  Grammar  School    .    . 
*Framingham  High  School 

Frankfurt  Gymnasium,  Germany 

Franklin  and  Marshall  College,  Lancaster,  Pa.     . 

fFriends'  Academy,  New  Bedford 

*Gardner  High  School 

Georgetown  College,  D.  C 

• 

1 

2 

Gibbens  and  Beach,  Private  School,  New  York   . 
*  Gloucester  High  School 

2 
2 

1 
1 

2 

Goff,  C.  B.,Engl.  &  Class.  Sch.,  Providence,  R.I. 

Griswold  College,  Davenport,  Iowa 

Groton  School,  Groton 

Grove  City  College,  Pa 

Gunnery  School,  Washington,  Conn 

Hale,  Albert,  Private  School,  Boston 

Hamilton  College,  Clinton,  N.  Y 

Hamline  University,  St.  Paul,  Minn 

Hanover  College,  Ind 

• 

fHarrow,  England 

fHarry  Hillman  Academy,  Wilkes-Barre,  Pa.     .    . 
*Hartford,  Conn.,  High  School 

1 

8 

1 

i 

9 

1 
1 

2 
1 

1 

2 

1*8 
2 

6 
1 

1 
4 

• 

10 

1 

1 

1 

i 

2 

i 

Harvard  Graduate  Student 

Harvard  College  Special  Student 

Harvard  Divinity  School 

Harvard  Medical  School,  Boston 

Harvard  School,  Chicago,  111 

Harvard  V.eterinary  School,  Boston 

Haverford  College,  Pa 

*Haverhill  High  School 

Hill  School,  Pottstown,  Pa 

*Hingham  High  School 

Hobart  College,  Geneva,  N.  Y 

Holbrook's  Military  School,  Sing  Sing,  N.  Y.  .    . 
Hopkinson,  John  P.,  Private  School,  Boston    .    . 

Howard  College,  Marion,  Ala 

Howard  University,  Washington,  D.  C 

*Hyde  Park  High  School 

14 

i 

i 
I 

*Hyde  Park,  111.,  High  School 

Illinois  State  Normal  University,  Normal,  111.     . 

Indianapolis,  Ind.,  Classical  School 

*IndianapoHs,  Ind.,  High  School 

*Indiana  State  Normal  School,  Indiana,  Pa.   .    .    . 

Indiana  University,  Bloomington,  Ind 

Iowa  College,  Grinnell,  Iowa 

fives  Seminary,  Antwerp,  N.  Y 

Jarvis  Hall,  Denver,  Colo 

Johns  Hopkins  University,  Baltimore,  Md.  .    .    . 

*KansasCity,  Mo.,  High  School 

Kendall,  Joshua,  Private  School,  Cambridge    .    . 
Kentucky  Wesleyan  College,  Millersburg,  Ky.     . 

Kenyon  College,  Gambler,  0 

Keystone  Academy,  Factoryville,  Pa 

King's  School,  Stamford,  Conn 

2 

2 
1 

1 

2 

54 


Knox  College,  Galesburg,  111 

Lafayette  College,  Easton,  Pa 

*Lancaster  High  School 

fLawrence  Academy,  Groton 

*Lawrence  High  School 

Lawrence  Scientific  School,  Cambridge     .... 

Lawrence  University,  Appleton,  Wis 

fLawrenceville  School,  N.  J 

*Leominster,  Field  High  School    ........ 

LeRoy,  N.  Y.,  Academy 

*Lexington  High  School 

♦Louisville,  Ky.,  Male  High  School 

*Lowell  High  School 

*Lynn  High  School 

fMcCollom  Institute,  Mt.  Vernon,  N.  H 

Madison  University,  Hamilton,  N.  Y 

*Malden  High  School 

Marietta  College,  Ohio 

Mass.  Institute  of  Technology,  Boston 

Milwaukee,  Wis.,  Academy 

*Marlboro'  High  School 

Marlborough  St.  School,  Boston 

Marston's  University  School,  Baltimore,  Md.    .    . 

Maupin's  University  School,  EUicott  City,  Md.    . 

*Medford  High  School 

*Melrose  High  School 

*Merrimac  High  School 

*Methuen  High  School 

*Michigan  State  Normal  School,  Ypsilanti  .... 

Middleburv  College,  Yt 

*Milford  High  School 

♦Milwaukee,  Wis.,  High  School 

Monmouth  College,  111 

*Montclair,  N.  J.,  High  School 

*Montpelier,  Yt.,  High  School 

Morse,  J.  H.,  Private  School,  New  York  .    .    .    . 

Mt.  Allison  College,  Sackville,  N.  B 

Mt.  Pleasant  Military  Academy,  Sing  Sing,  N.  Y. 

Nashville,  Tenn.,  State  Normal  College     .    .    .    . 

*Natick  High  School 

*Needham  High  School 

*Newark,  N.  J.,  High  School 

*Newburyport,  Brown  High  and  Putnam  Schools  . 

fNew  Church  School,  Waltham 

♦Newport,  R.  I.,  Rogers  High  School 

*Newton  High  School 

Newton,  N.  J.,  Collegiate  Institute 

New  York  School  of  Languages 

fNichols  Academy,  Dudley 

Nichols,  Wm.,  Private  School,  Boston 

Noble,  G.  W.  C,  Private  School,  Boston  .... 

*Nortliampton  Higli  School 

*Nortli  Attleboro'  High  School 

Nortliwestern  University,  Evanston,  111 

Oherlin  College,  Ohio 

Ohio  Wesleyan  University,  ]3elaware,  O 

*Omaha,  Neb.,  High  School 

Park  Institute,  Rye,  N.  Y 


55 


*Pawtucket,  R.  I.,  High  School 

Peekskill,  N.  Y.,  Military  Academy    .    .    .    .    , 

Pennsylvania  College,  Gettysburg,  Pa.    .    .    .    , 

*Philadelp]na,  Penn.,  High  School 

fPhillips  Academy,  Andover 

fPliillips  Academy,  Exeter,  N.  H 

Pierce  Christian  College,  College  City,  Cal.  . 

Pine  Hill  Theological  College,  Halifax,  N.  S. 

fPinkerton  Academy,  Derry,  N.  H 

*Pittsburg,  Pa. ,  Central  High  School    .... 

*Portland,  Me.,  High  School 

^Portsmouth,  N.  H.,  High  School 

Proctor  Academy,  Andover,  N.  H 

Pro-Gymnasium,  Germany 

*Providence,  R.  I.,  High  School 

Ripon  College,  Wis •     .    . 

Riverview  Academy,  Poughkeepsie,  N.  Y.     . 
fRochester,  N.  Y.,  Free  Academy 

Rochester,  N.  Y.,  Theological  Seminary    .    . 

*Romeo,  Mich.,  High  School 

tRoxbury  Latin  School 

Rugby  Academy,  Philadelphia,  Pa 

Sachs'  Collegiate  Institute,  New  York    .    .    . 
fSt.  Johnsbury,  Vt.,  Academy 

St.  John's  College,  Fordham,  N.  Y 

St.  John's  School,  Manlius,  N.  Y 

fSt.  John's  School,  Presque  Isle,  Me 

St.  John's  School,  Sing  Sing,  N.  Y 

St.  Lawrence  University,  Canton,  N.  Y.     .    . 

tSt.  Mark's  School,  Southboro' 

*St.  Paul,  Minn.,  High  School 

tSt.  Paul's  School,  Concord,  N.  H 

St.  Stephen's  College,  Annandale,  N.  Y.    .    . 

*Salem  High  School , 

*San  Francisco,  Cal.,  Boys'  High  School    .    . 

School  of  the  Lackawanna,  Scranton,  Pa.     . 

Shortlidge's  Media  Academy,  Pa 

Skaneateles,  N.  Y.,  Union  School   .    .    •  .    . 

Smith  Academy,  St.  Louis,  Mo 

*SomerviIle  High  School 

Southwestern  Presb.  Univ.,  Clarksville,  Tenn. 

♦Springfield  High  School , 

*Springfield,  111.,  High  School 

Spring  Hill  College,  near  Mobile,  Ala.  .    .    . 

State  College  of  Kentucky,  Lexington,  Ky.  . 

State  University  of  Iowa,  Iowa  City  .... 

Stewart  Academy,  Reading,  Pa 

Swarthmore  College,  Pa 

♦Syracuse,  N.  Y.,  High  School 

Syracuse  University,  N.  Y 

Tabor  Academy,  Marion 

♦Taunton  High  School 

fThayer  Academy,  South  Braintree 

Trinity  College,  Hartford,  Conn 

Trinity  School,  Tivoli,  N.  Y 

*Troy,  N.Y.,  High  School 

Tufts  College,  College  Hill 

fUnion  Academy,  Belleville,  N.  Y 


14 


12 


19 


56 


1 

i 

i 

i 

1 

1 

1^ 

CO 

oo 

oo 

i 

TJniversite  de  France 

1 

37 

2 

1 

i 

1 
1 

1 

2 

2 

2 

i 

30 

3 
1 

4 

1 
2 

36 

2 
2 

1 

1 
1 

2 

2 

1 
33 

1 

1 

1 
1 

1 

1 
1 

3 
31 

2 
1 

1 

1 

2 

1 

2 
1 
1 

1 
3 

33 

1 

1 
2 

1 

3 
2 

1 

2 

1 

2 

1 

1 
2 

1 

1 

2 

3 
3 

1 

2 

4 
1 
2 

54 

University  Grammar  School,  Providence,  E.  I.   . 

University  of  Alabama,  Ala 

University  of  California,  Berkeley,  Cal 

University  of  the  City  of  New  York 

University  of  Des  Moines,  Iowa 

1 

1 

University  of  Georgia,  Athens,  Ga 

University  of  Illinois,  Champaign,  111 

University  of  Kansas,  Lawrence,  Kan 

University  of  Michigan,  Ann  Arbor,  Mich.  .    .    . 
University  of  New  Brunswick,  Fredericton,  N.  B. 

University  of  Oregon,  Eugene  City,  Ore 

University  of  Pennsylvania,  Philadelphia,  Pa.     . 
University  of  Rochester,  N.  Y 

University  of  State  of  Missouri,  Columbia,  Mo. 
University  of  Tennessee,  Knoxville,  Tenn.  .    .    . 

University  of  Vermont,  Burlington,  Vt 

University  of  Virginia,  Va 

University  of  Wisconsin,  Madison,  Wis 

University  of  Wooster,  0 

University  School,  Chicago,  111 

University  School,  Petersburg,  Va 

University  School,  San  Francisco,  Cal 

Urban  School,  San  Francisco,  Cal 

Utica,  N.  Y.,  Academy . 

Vanderbilt  University,  Nashville,  Tenn 

fVermont  Academy,  Saxton's  River,  Vt.     .... 
fVermont  Episcopal  Institute,  Burlington,  Vt.  .    . 

*Wakefield  High  School 

*Waltham  High  School 

Warsaw,  N.Y.,  Union  School 

Washburn  College,  Topeka,  Kan 

*Washmgton,  D.  C,  High  School 

*  Washington  Co.,  Vt.,  Grammar  Sch.,  Montpelier 

Washington  University,  St.  Louis,  Mo 

*Watertown  High  School 

*Wellesley  High  School 

Wesleyan  University,  Middletown,  Conn.      .    .    . 

tWestern  Reserve  Academy,  Hudson,  0 

*Westfield  High  School 

2 

3 

i 

3 
53 

36 

West  Newton  English  and  Classical  School  .    .    . 

White  &  Sykes,  Franklin  School,  Cincinnati,  0.  . 

William  Jewell  College,  Liberty,  Mo 

tWilliam  Penn  Charter  School,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 

Williams  College,  Williamstown 

tWilliston  Seminary,  East  Hampton 

Wilson  and  Kellogg,  Private  School,  New  York  . 

*  Winchester  High  School 

*Winsted,  Conn.,  High  School 

*Woburn  High  School  .    .    ,    . 

*Woonsocket,  R.  I.,  High  School 

fWorcester  Academy 

*  Worcester  High  School 

3 
1 

i 
1 
1 

2 

48 

fWorcester  Polytechnic  Institute 

Yale  College,  New  Haven,  Conn 

Private  Pupils 

PUBLICATIONS   OF   HARVARD   UNIVERSITY. 


Harvard  University  Catalogue.     12°.     .60. 

Contains  over  400  pages,  giving  detailed  information  concerning  all  departments  of  the  Uni- 
versity. Portions  of  the  Catalogue  giving  necessary  information  regarding  the  various  depart- 
ments are  also  issued  separately  for  free  distribution. 

Harvard  University  Calendar.     $1.00. 

Contains  announcements  of  lectures  and  exercises  which  are  open  to  the  public.  It  appears 
weekly  from  October  to  June. 

Harvard  University  Bulletin.     $1.00. 

Contains  extracts  from  the  records  of  the  governing  bodies  of  the  University,  necrology  of 
graduates,  accessions  to  the  University  Libraiies,  with  special  bibliographies  and  articles  of  a 
bibliographical  nature.     It  appears  in  October,  January,  May. 

Annual  Reports  of  the  President  and  Treasurer  of  Harvard  College.     S''. 

This  volume  contains  also  the  reports  from  the  various  departments  and  establishments  of  the 
University.  The  Report  of  the  Treasurer  and  those  of  several  of  the  departments  are  also  issued 
separately. 

Bibliographical  Contributions. 

In  part  republished  from  the  Bulletin.  The  numbers  appear  at  irregular  intervals,  averaging 
from  three  to  six  annually. 

Harvard  University  Examination  Papers.     8°. 

Separate  parts  containing  papers  used  at  the  final  examinations  in  Harvard  College,  the 
admission  examinations  for  Harvard  College,  the  Law  School,  Medical  School,  etc. 

Annals  of  the  Observatory  of  Harvard  College.     4°. 

Seven  parts,  aggregating  nearly  600  pages,  appeared  in  1889-90.  The  records  thus  published 
include  both  Astronomical  and  Meteorological  observations. 

Memoirs  of  the  Museum  of  Comparative  Zoology  at  Harvard  College.     4°. 

Volumes  IX.,  XI.,  XIV.,  XVII.,  are  now  in  process  of  publication  in  parts. 
Bulletin  of  the  Museum  of  Comparative  Zoology  at  Harvard  College.     8". 

Volumes  XVI.,  XVII.,  XX.,  are  now  appearing  in  parts. 
Archaeological  and  Ethnological  Papers   of  the  Peabody  Museum  at  Harvard 
College. 

These  papers  will  appear  at  irregular  intervals,  but  will  be  paged  continuously. 

Note.  —  The  "  Proceedings  "  of  the  American  Academy  of  Arts  and  Sciences 
is  the  chief  vehicle  for  the  contributions  of  the  Chemical,  Physical,  and  Botanical 
Departments  of  the  University,  which  often  occupy  the  greater  number  of  its 
pages.  The  Medical  Department  issues  occasionally  a  volume  of  papers  for 
limited  circulation. 


The  Quarterly  Journal  of  Economics.     Boston  :  Geo.  H.  Ellis.     New  York  and 

London  :  Macmillan  &  Co.     8°.     $2.00. 

Besides  original  papers  in  Economic  History,  Criticism,  etc.,  each  number  contains  Corre- 
spondence, Reviews,  and  a  Bibliography  of  Economics,  including  articles  in  periodicals. 
Appears  October,  January,  April,  July. 

Harvard  Studies  in  Classical  Philology.     Boston.     Ginn  &  Co.     8°.     $1.00. 

A  volume  of  about  200  pages  will  be  issued  yearly.    The  first  appeared  in  January,  1890. 

Harvard  Historical  Monographs.     Boston.     Ginn  &  Co.     8". 

The  monographs  will  appear  at  irregular  intervals.  No.  1 :  "A  History  of  the  Veto  Power," 
by  Edw.  C.  Mason,  Instructor  in  Political  Economy,  |1.00,  and  No.  2  :  "An  Introduction  to  the 
Study  of  Federal  Government,"  by  Albert  Bushnell  Hart,  Asst.  Professsor  of  History,  $1.00, 
have  appeared. 

Harvard  Law  Review.     A  monthly  journal  of  law  published  by  Harvard  Law 

Students.      Cambridge.      Harvard  Law  Review  Publishing   Association. 

$2.50. 
Contains  papers  dealing  with  the  various  branches  and  aspects  of  the  law,  notes  of  important 
decisions  in  the  courts  of  this  country  and  of  England,  reviews,  summaries  of  law  periodicals,  etc. 
A  volume  comprises  eight  numbers,  appearing  from  October  to  March. 

***  The  price  stated  is  for  a  complete  volume,  or  a  subscription  for  the  College  year;  when 
no  price  is  given  the  publication  is,  in  general,  sold  in  separate  parts,  and  at  a  price  vaiying 
according  to  the  number  of  pages  and  of  illustrations  in  each  part. 


UNIVERSITV  of  ILLINOIS 


HARVARD   UNIVERSITY. 


A  BRIEP  STATEMENT  OF  WHAT  HARVARD  UNIVERSITY  IS 

HOW  IT  MAY  BE  ENTERED  AND  HOW  ITS 

DEGREES  MAY  BE  OBTAINED. 


By  frank  BOLLES, 

Secretary  of  Harvard  University 


SECOND  ANNUAL  EDITION. 


CAMBRIDGE,   MASS. 

PUBLISHED    BY    THE    UNIVERSITY. 

1892. 


HARVARD   UNIVERSITY, 


A  BRIEF  STATEMENT  OF  WHAT  HAEVAED  UNIVERSITY  IS, 

HOW  IT   MAY   BE   ENTERED  AND   HOW  ITS 

DEGREES  MAY  BE  OBTAINED. 


By  frank   BOLLES, 

Secretary  of  Harvard  University 


SECOND  ANNUAL  EDITION. 


CAMBRIDGE,    MASS. 
PUBLISHED    BY    THE     UNIVERSITY. 

1892. 


PREFATORY    NOTE. 

This  descriptive  statement  is  designed  to  answer,  in  a  less  formal 
way  tlian  the  annual  Catalogue  answers  them,  many  of  the  questiona 
which  the  intelligent  public  ask  concerning  Harvard  University  and 
its  wa3'S  and  means. 

FRANK    BOLLES, 

Cambridge,  February,  1892. 


HARVARD    UNIVERSITY. 


A  BRIEF  STATEMENT  OF  WHAT  HARVARD  UNIVERSITY  IS,  HOW  IT  MAY 
BE   ENTERED,   AND   HOW  ITS  DEGREES  MAY  BE   OBTAINED. 


Harvard  College  is  the  oldest  of  American  institutioos  of  learning, 
having  been  founded  in  1636.  What  is  now  known  as  Harvard  Uni- 
versit}^  includes  the  College,  the  Scientific  School,  the  Graduate  School, 
and  six  Professional  Schools. 

The  College,  Graduate  School,  and  the  Divinity,  Law,  and  Scien- 
tific Schools  are  situated  in  Cambridge,  Massachusetts,  a  city  of 
over  70,000  inhabitants.  The  Medical  School,  the  Dental  School, 
the  School  of  Veterinary  Medicine,  and  the  Bussey  Institution  (a 
school  of  Agriculture  and  Horticulture)  are  situated  in  Boston, 
a  city  of  about  450,000  inhabitants.  The  two  cities  are  connected 
by  steam,  electric,  and  horse  railways,  and  are  separated  by  the 
Charles  River.  The  distance  from  the  College  buildings  to  the  busi- 
ness centre  of  Boston  is  three  miles. 

The  University  is  governed  primarily  by  two  Boards,  the  Corpora- 
tion and  the  Overseers.     The  Corporation  (of  which  the  legal  title  is 
the  President  and  Fellows  of  Harvard  College)  consists  of  the  Presi- 
dent, Treasurer,  and  five  Fellows,  all  of  whom  hold  office  for  life. 
In  it  is  vested  the  title  to  the  property  of  the  University,  estimated 
to  be  w^orth  between  eleven  and  twelve  million  dollars.     The  Over- 
seers number  thirty-two,  including  the  President  and  Treasurer  of 
the  University,  who  are  ex  officio  members.     Five  of  the  Overseers 
go  out  of  office  each  year,  their  places  being  filled  on  Commencement 
.;^  Day  by  an  election  in  which  alumni  of  the  College  of  five  years  stand- 
^  ing.   Masters   of  Arts,   and   holders  of  honorary   degrees   from  the 
^C^University  are  entitled  to  vote,  if  present  in  person. 
^      The  principal  administrative   officers   of   the   University   are    the 
>?  President,  the  Treasurer,  the  Deans  of  the  various  Faculties,  Schools, 
^and   Administrative   Boards;  the  Bursar,  and  the  Secretary-.      The 
;5!  President  is  the   presiding  officer  of  the   Corporation  and  of   each 
.^•^  of  the  Faculties,  and  he  exercises  a  general  superintendence  over 
^    all  the  manifold  concerns  of  the  institution.     The  Treasurer  is  the 
custodian  of  the  property  of  the  University,  makes  its  investments, 
and  keeps  its  financial  accounts.     The  Deans  conduct  the  business 
^  of  their  several  Faculties  or  Administrative  Boards.     The  Bursar  is 


^^'^^^^ 


the  Treasurer's  agent  in  dealing  with  students  in  renting  rooms, 
settling  term  bills,  and  similar  matters.  The  Secretary  conducts  the 
correspondence  of  the  University. 

The  College,  Scientific  School,  and  Graduate  School  are  under 
the  control  of  the  Faculty  of  Arts  and  Sciences,  from  which  are  ap- 
pointed three  executive  committees,  called  Administrative  Boards, 
each  of  which  has  its  Dean,  and  by  which  the  College,  the  Scientific 
School,  and  the  Graduate  School  are  severally  governed. 

Each  Professional  School  has  a  separate  Faculty,  composed  of  all 
its  professors  and  other  teachers  holding  appointments  for  more  than 
one  year. 

The  degrees  conferred  by  the  various  departments  are  eleven  in 
number,  as  follows  :  — 

By  the  Faculty  of  Arts  and  Sciences  :  Bachelor  of  Arts,  Bachelor 
of  Science,  Master  of  Arts,  Doctor  of  Philosophy,  and  Doctor  of 
Science. 

By  the  Faculty  of  the  Divinity  School :    Bachelor  of  Divinity. 

By  the  Faculty  of  the  Law  School :  Bachelor  of  Laws. 

By  the  Faculty  of  the  Medical  School :  Doctor  of  Medicine. 

By  the  Faculty  of  the  Dental  School :    Doctor  of  Dental  Medicine. 

By  the  Faculty  of  the  Veterinary  School :  Doctor  of  Veterinary 
Medicine. 

By  the  Faculty  of  the  Bussey  Institution  :  Bachelor  of  Agricultural 
Science. 

The  degree  of  Master  of  Arts  is  given  with  the  professional  degree 
to  graduates  with  high  credit  of  the  Divinity,  Law,  and  Medical 
Schools  who  are  also  graduates  of  Harvard  College  or  whose  pre- 
vious training  has  been  recognized  by  the  Faculty  of  Arts  and 
Sciences  as  equivalent  to  that  of  a  Harvard  Bachelor  of  Arts. 

The  honorary  degrees  of  Master  of  Arts,  Doctor  of  Divinity,  and 
Doctor  of  Laws  are  occasionally  conferred  upon  eminent  persons 
selected  by  the  Corporation  and  approved  by  the  Overseers. 

The  roll  of  graduates  of  the  University  includes  the  names  of  nearly 
18,000  men,  of  whom  about  one  half  are  supposed  to  be  living. 

The  libraries  of  the  University  contain  about  400,000  bound  volumes 
and  an  approximately  equal  number  of  pamphlets.  Students  are 
charged  no  fees  for  the  use  of  books.  Ample  endowments  make  it 
possible  for  teachers  to  have  books  of  reference  needed  for  the  in- 
struction of  their  classes  purchased  by  the  Librar}-. 

In  addition  to  the  various  departments  already  named,  the  Univer- 
sity has  several  other  important  branches  which  will  be  described 
subsequently.  These  are  the  Astronomical  Observatory,  the  Univer- 
sity Museum,  including  the  Museum  of  Comparative  Zoology  and 


its  Natural  History  Laboratories,  the  Botanical  and  Mineralogical 
Museums,  the  Peabody  Museum  of  American  Archaeology  and  Eth- 
nology, the  Semitic  Museum,  the  Anatomical  Museum,  the  Botanic 
Garden,  the  Herbarium,  the  Arnold  Arboretum,  the  Chemical  Labora- 
tory, the  Jefferson  Physical  Laboratory,  and  the  Veterinary  Hospital. 
The  Hemenway  Gymnasium  is  for  the  use  of  the  whole  University. 
The  Universit}'  Chapel,  seating  900  persons,  is  controlled  by  the 
Preachers  to  the  Universit}^,  who  are  ordained  ministers  representing 
different  Protestant  denominations.  The  Harvard  Dining  Associa- 
tion, occupying  the  great  dining  hall  in  Memorial  Hall,  is  a  voluntar}^ 
association  which  provides  about  1000  officers  and  students  with  a 
good  quality  of  board  at  cost  price,  usuall}^  about  $4  a  week.  The 
Harvard  Cooperative  Society'  is  a  voluntary  association  of  officers 
and  students  wdiich  supplies  members  of  the  University  with  books, 
stationers'  materials,  fancy  articles,  men's  furnishing  goods,  and  a 
great  variety  of  miscellaneous  articles.  Its  annual  sales  amount  to 
over  $70,000.  The  Foxcroft  Club  is  a  third  association  of  a  cooper- 
ative character  composed  largely  of  students  living  at  home  or  at  a  dis- 
tance from  the  College  buildings.  It  has  study  rooms,  lunch  rooms, 
a  consulting  library,  and  other  conveniences  adapted  to  the  needs  of 
non-resident  students.  Meals  are  supplied  at  cost  by  the  card,  and 
the  average  expenditure  per  man  is  less  than  three  dollars  a  week. 
These  three  associations  are  managed  by  boards  of  directors  chosen 
by  ballot  from  among  the  officers  and  students  of  the  various  depart- 
ments of  the  University.  There  is  also  a  Loan-Furniture  Association, 
managed  by  officers  and  students,  which  lends  students  sets  of  furni- 
ture at  a  price  just  sufficient  to  replace  the  association  property  as  it 
is  worn  out. 

The  University  owns  in  Cambridge  twelve  dormitories  or  halls. 
These  have  accommodations  for  973  students,  provided  all  double 
rooms  are  occupied  by  two  persons.  As  a  matter  of  fact  the  number 
of  double  rooms  held  b}^  students  preferring  to  lodge  alone  is  large. 
Rents  range  from  $25  to  $350  a  year.  Full  information  regarding 
prices  and  the  methods  of  securing,  rooms  can  be  obtained  from 
the  Bursar.  There  are  a  number  of  large  private  dormitories  ad- 
joining the  College  grounds,  and  students  are  received  as  lodgers 
or  boarders  in  many  private  houses  in  various  parts  of  Cambridge, 
Boston,  and  suburban  towns.  Furnished  rooms,  suitable  for  either 
one  or  two  persons,  are  obtainable  at  a  distance  from  the  College 
Yard  at  low  rents,  as  for  example  from  $35  to  $75  a  3^ear.  Good 
order  is  maintained  in  College  and  private  dormitories  by  graduates 
or  instructors  holding  appointments  as  Proctors.  Proctors  are  under 
the  direction  of  the  Regent.     At  the  discretion  of  the  Regent,  a  Proc- 


6 

tor  ma}^  be  placed  in  any  private  iionse  where  students  lodge,  if  the 
maintainance  of  good  order  in  the  house  seems  to  require  it. 

The  athletic  sports  of  the  University  are  regulated  by  a  com- 
mission, composed  of  three  graduates,  three  professors,  and  three 
students,  which  acts  independently  of  any  Faculty.  The  sports 
include  rowing,  canoeing,  base-ball,  foot-ball,  lacrosse,  lawn-tennis, 
cricket,  polo,  rifle-shooting,  hare  and  hounds  races  ;  track  athletics, 
including  bicycle  racing,  running  and  jumping ;  and  gymnasium 
exercises  of  various  kinds,  which  are  under  the  general  supervision 
of  Dudley  A.  Sargent,  M.D.,  the  Director  of  the  Gymnasium. 
The  athletic  facilities  of  the  University  are  excellent.  The  Charles 
River  with  its  miles  of  broad  surface  is  only  a  few  minutes'  walk 
from  the  College.  The  University  Boat  Houses  are  conveniently 
located  on  its  nearer  bank.  The  foot-ball,  base-ball,  tennis,  and 
other  fields  are  in  the  immediate  vicinity  of  the  Gymnasium,  the  Fives 
Courts,  and  the  Rowing  Tank.  The  country  roads  around  Cambridge 
are  well  made,  inviting  horseback  and  bicycle  riding,  driving,  and 
walking.  Skating  and  tobogganing  are  popular  sports  in  their  sea- 
son, wirich  lasts  in  ordinary  years  from  December  to  March.  The 
principal  athletic  events  of  the  year  are  the  championship  foot-ball 
games  in  the  autumn,  the  in-door  Gymnasium  contests  in  the  winter, 
the  championship  base-ball  games  in  the  spring,  and  the  annual  boat 
races  at  New  London  in  the  early  summer.  Only  students  whose 
conduct  and  standing  in  College  and  whose  physical  condition  are 
satisfactory  are  allowed  to  take  part  in  public  athletic  contests  or 
similar  exhibitions.  The  money  accounts  of  the  various  athletic 
organizations  are  under  the  direction  of  a  graduate  treasurer  ap- 
pointed by  the  Athletic  Commission. 

The  University  contains  a  great  number  of  literary,  dramatic, 
religious,  scientific,  musical,  and  social  societies.  Among  the  most 
prominent  are  the  Union,  where  social  and  political  questions  of 
national  interest  are  debated  ;  the  Hasty  Pudding  Club,  founded  in 
1795,  which  has  a  large  club-house  and  theatre ;  the  Harvard  branch 
of  the  Y.  M.  C.  A.  ;  the  Total  Abstinence  League ;  the  Deulscher 
Verein  and  Conference  Fran9aise  ;  the  Glee  Club  and  Pierian  Sodal- 
ity ;  and  several  Greek  letter  societies,  including  the  Phi  Beta 
Kappa  and  Alpha  Delta  Phi.  In  the  Law  School  are  several  clubs 
which  conduct  Moot  Courts  at  stated  periods.  The  other  Professional 
Schools  have  analogous  societies  which  form  useful  adjuncts  to  class- 
room work. 

Tlie  University  itself  publishes  an  annual  Catalogue  (price  85c.)  ; 
the  annual  report  of  the  President  and  Treasurer ;  the  Quarterly 
Journal  of  Economics  ;  the  Historical  Monographs  ;  Studies  in  Classi- 
cal Philology  ;  the  Library  Bulletin  ;  the  Weekly  Calendar  ;  and  vari- 


ous  pamphlets  for  general  distribiiton.  Students  publish  the  annual 
Index,  with  records  of  sports  and  societies  ;  the  Law  Review  ;  the 
Advocate  (bi-weekly)  ;  the  Lampoon  (an  illustrated  fortnightly)  ; 
the  Harvard  Monthly  ;  and  the  Daily  Crimson.  The  experience  ob- 
tained on  these  papers,  especially  the  last-named,  enables  some  of 
their  editors  to  make  successful  beginnings  in  journalism  as  soon  as 
they  leave  College,  and  to  earn  money  during  their  College  course  by 
serving  as  correspondents  for  some  of  the  city  journals.  Students 
can  earn  money  while  in  Cambridge  by  private  tutoring  ;  singing  in 
the  College  Choir  and  in  the  choirs  of  the  neighboring  churches  ; 
•doing  clerical  or  stenographic  work  ;  and  type-writing.  Active,  ener- 
getic students,  while  able  to  live  as  cheaply  in  Cambridge  as  at 
colleges  in  rural  districts,  find  not  only  that  there  are  more  ways  of 
earning  money,  but  that  more  is  paid  them  for  the  same  services.  As 
is  shown  by  the  accompanying  table,  the  University  distributes  over 
185,000  a  year  in  scholarships,  beneficiar}^  funds,  and  prizes.  Merit 
and  need  are  the  elements  which  determine  distribution. 

Income    of    Funds,    and   other    Sums   availabue   in   1890-91   in  Harvard 
University,    as   money-aids   to    Students. 

Graduate  School.     Fellowships $10,700 

"  "  Scholarships 11,150 

''  "  Prizes 1,475* 

Harvard  College.  Scholarships 22,545 

"  "  Beneficiary  Funds 19,000 

"  "  Loan  Funds 3,248 

"  "  Prizes 1,055* 

Lawrence  Scientific 

School.  Scholarships 2,400 

Divinity  School.  Scholarships 1,385 

"               "  Beneficiary  Funds 720 

"              "  Hopkins  Fund 1,950 

"               "  Williams  Fund 4,000 

"               "  Williams  Fellowships 1,000 

Law  School.  Scholarships 1,500 

"  "  Prizes 100 

"  "  Foster  Fund [150]t 

Medical  School.        Fellowships 750 

"  "  Scholarships 1,500 

"  "  Foster  Fund 150f 

Prizes 375 

$85,003 

*  Many  prizes  open  to  graduate  students  are  also  open  to  undergraduates  and 
to  students  in  other  departments. 

t  The  income  of  the  Foster  Fund  is  available  in  the  Law  and  Medical  Schools 
in  alternate  years. 


8 

The  annual  outlay  of  an  economical  student  who  comes  to  Cam- 
bridge witli  a  good  supply  of  clothing  and  bed  linen  is  necessarily 
nearly  $400.  For  tuition  he  must  pay  $150  (except  in  the  Divinity 
School,  where  the  fee  is  $50  ;  and  in  the  Medical  School,  where  it  is 
$200).  A  room  furnished,  lighted,  and  warmed  cannot  well  cost 
less  than  $35,  even  if  it  is  small  and  inconveniently  located.  Books, 
stationery,  and  laboratory  fees  amount  to  about  $20  a  year ;  and 
washing  to  at  least  $15.  Wholesome  food  can  be  procured  for  about 
$2.75  a  week,  although  a  few  students  live  for  a  little  less.  Sundries 
may  reach  $40  for  the  year,  especially  if  by  living  at  a  distance  the 
student  spends  a  good  deal  in  car  fares.  Allowing  nothing  for 
clothing,  these  estimates  would  make  the  expenses  of  the  first  year  in 
College  $367.  After  that  they  tend  to  grow  larger.  Students  who 
are  not  forced  to  practice  strict  economy  of  course  spend  more  than 
the  sums  named.  Perhaps  a  quarter  of  each  college  class  live  on 
less  than  $600  a  year,  clothes  included.  Another  quarter  spend  be- 
tween $600  and  $800.  Every  dollar  over  $1200  which  even  the 
richest  student  spends  is,  as  a  wise  writer  on  this  point  has  said, 
"  a  dollar  of  danger."  The  same  writer  has  said  as  to  the  advisa- 
bility of  encouraging  poor  men  to  come  to  Harvard  :  — 

"Whenever  you  encounter  a  poor  boy  of  eager,  aggressive 
mind,  a  youth  of  energy,  one  capable  of  feeling  the  enjoyment  of 
struggling  with  a  multitude,  of  making  his  merit  known,  say  to 
him  that  Harvard  College  is  expressly  constituted  for  such  as 
he.  Here  he  will  find  the  largest  provision  for  his  needs  and  the 
clearest  field  for  his  talents.  Money  is  a  power  everywhere.  It 
is  a  power  here ;  but  a  power  of  far  more  restricted  scope  than  in 
the  world  at  large.  In  this  magnificent  hall  (Memorial  Hall)  rich 
and  poor  dine  together  daily.  At  the  Union  they  debate  together. 
At  the  clubs  which  foster  special  interests,  —  the  Finance  Club, 
the  Philological  Club,  the  Philosophical  Club,  the  French  Club,  the 
Signet,  and  the  O.  K.,  —  considerations  of  money  have  no  place. 
If  the  poor  man  is  a  man  of  muscle,  the  athletic  organizations  will 
welcome  him  ;  if  a  man  skilled  in  words,  he  will  be  made  an  editor 
of  the  college  papers  ;  and  if  he  has  the  powers  that  fit  him  for  the 
place,  the  whole  body  of  his  class-mates  will  elect  him  Orator,  Ivy 
Orator,  Odist,  or  Poet,  without  the  slightest  regard  to  whether  his 
purse  is  full  or  empty." 

Since  this  was  written  its  truth  has  been  strikingly  exemplified  by 
the  election  to  the  class  oratorship  of  a  man  who  had  not  only  worked 
his  way  into  and  through  College,  but  who  was  of  unmixed  negro 
blood. 

The  following  letter  tells  the  story  of  a  white  undergraduate  who 


came  recently  from  a  Southern  State,  without  a  friend  in  Cambridge, 
made  his  way  on  the  slenderest  possible  income,  and  graduated  with 
distinction. 

Harvard  College,  April  19,  1889. 
In  reply  to  your  question  I  would  state  that  my  expenses  for  the  past 
two  college  years  have  been  as  follows.     I  record  only  the  necessary 

expenses. 

For  1887-88. 

Room  rent,  fuel,  etc $40.00 

Board,  private,  15  weeks 52.50 

"       at  Memorial  24  weeks 99.00 

Clothing,  including  washing 60.00 

Books  and  stationery 15.00 

Tuition 150.00 

Laboratory  fees 25.00 

441.50 

Deduct  for  Laboratory 25.00 

$416.50 
For  1888-89. 

Room  rent,  fuel,  and  lights $40.00 

Board,  private 140.00 

Clothing  and  washing 40.00 

Books  and  stationery 10.00 

Tuition 150.00 

Laboratory  fees 55.00 

435.00 

Deduct  for  Laboratory 55.00 

$380.00 

I  will  state  tliat  I  entered  Harvard  with  but  two  hundred  dollars  a  year 

to  pay  my  expenses  with,  which  is  less  money  than  I  spent  at  the  

College.     The  abov^e  is  not  an  under-estimate  of  what  I  have  actually 

spent  for  the  items  named,  but  so  far  as  I  am  able  to  give,  the  exact 
figures.    With  the  assistance  I  can  get  here,  I  am  enabled  to  live  better 

and  cheaper  than  at  the College.     I  am  satisfied  that  any  good 

student  from  the  South  can,  with  the  assistance  offered  at  Harvard,  live 
with  as  little  cost  to  himself  as  he  can  at  the  Southern  colleges. 

I  am  yours  truly,  . 

If  a  student  in  regular  standing  passes  successfully  through  his 
first  year  at  Harvard  and  proves  himself  to  be  upright  in  character, 
strong  in  body,  and  of  unmistakable  promise  intellectually,  the 
chances  are  against  his  being  compelled  to  leave  college  on  account  of 
lack  of  money.  When  his  course  is  finished  he  finds  no  great  diffi- 
culty in  obtaining  a  foothold  in  the  outside  world.  A  highly-recom- 
mended graduate  of  the  College,  or  of  any  of  the  Professional 
Schools,  as  a  rule  finds  himself  given  a  fair  chance  to  choose  the 


10 


part  of  the  country  in  which  he  will  accept  an  offer  to  enter  upon  his 
life  work.  The  demand  for  Harvard  Graduates  as  teachers  in  both 
schools  and  colleges  is  in  excess  of  the  number  of  persons  who  can 
be  cordially  lecommended  by  the  University  authorities.  The  same 
is  true  in  various  degrees  of  the  demand  for  young  men  to  enter  the 
railway  service,  journalism,  the  publishing  business,  and  other  walks 
of  life  where  a  college  training  is  of  practical  advantage.  Every 
effort  is  made  by  the  University  to  satisfy  applications  for  the  ser- 
vices of  graduates,,  and  every  student  of  merit  is  encouraged  to  ask 
aid  in  securing  the  employment  which  he  desires. 

The  following  table  illustrates  the  growth  of  the  University  during 
recent  years : — 


1869-70. 

1879-80. 

1889-90. 

1891-92. 

No.  of  Professors 

41 

52 

71 

74 

"     "  Asst.  Professors     .... 

7 

16 

21 

26 

Total  no. 

of  Teachers    .    .    .    .    . 

81 

150 

217 

253 

Students 

in  the  College      .... 

563 

828 

1,271 

1,456 

"     "    Graduate  School 

19 

51 

107 

189 

" 

"    "    Scientific      " 

52 

16 

65 

118 

"     "    Divinity 

36 

23 

35 

39 

"     "    Law 

120 

165 

254 

•    363 

"     "    Medical         " 

306 

251 

290 

399 

"    "    Dental 

16 

15 

35 

51 

"     "    Veterinary   " 

20 

31 

"     "   Busseylnstitution 

7 

2 

14 

"     "    Summer   School 

64 

220 

363 

Total  no. 

of  Students* 

1,112 

1,356 

2,079 

2,658 

No.  of  books  in  the  Library      .    . 

184,000 

253,000 

371,000 

400,000 

"     "  pamphlets           " 

110,000 

199,000 

300,000 

310,000 

Amount  of  aid  given 

125,000 

138,000 

$77,000 

$85,000 

*  Not  counting  students  in  the  Summer  School. 


11 


HARVARD   COLLEGE. 

The  matters  considered  thus  far  concern  the  University  as  a  whole. 
There  are  others  which  relate  to  the  several  departments.  Of  these 
departments  the  College  is  the  oldest  and  largest.  It  has  a  high 
standard  for  its  degree  of  Bachelor  of  Arts.  Few,  if  any,  other 
American  colleges  equal  it  in  this  particular.  This  fact  is  shown  by 
the  requirements  for  admission  and  graduation,  as  stated  in  the 
University  Catalogue,  and  exemplified  by  the  examination  papers  on 
admission  requirements  and  on  college  studies.  A  large  number  of 
high  schools  and  academies  are  quite  unable  to  fit  their  pupils  for 
Harvard  College  ;  and  many  of  the  best  preparatory  schools  provide 
extra  instruction  for  pupils  intending  to  enter  here.  Finally,  stu- 
dents coming  to  Harvard  from  another  college  seldom  find  it  for  their 
interest  to  enter  at  the  same  grade  which  they  held  at  the  college 
from  which  they  came.  Entrance  ad  eundem  can,  however,  always 
be  obtained  by  passing  the  required  examinations,  and  it  is  sometimes 
granted  without  examination  to  students  who  have  gone  temporarily 
to  another  college  and  have  maintained  there  a  specially  high  rank. 

Although  the  Harvard  standard  is  thus  seen  to  be  exceptionally 
high,  the  requirements  for  admission  are  much  more  elastic  than 
those  which  prevail  in  most  other  places.  The  simplest  form  of  the 
requirements  calls  for  a  specified  knowledge  of  English,  Greek, 
Latin,  German,  French,  history,  algebra,  plane  geometry  and  phys- 
ics, together  with  advanced  preparation  in  two  subjects  chosen  from 
the  languages  already  named,  mathematics,  and  physical  science. 
But  if  a  candidate  prefers  to  omit  either  Greek  or  Latin,  and  either 
French  or  German,  he  may  do  so  on  condition  of  passing  (under 
certain  restrictions  in  the  case  of  Greek  or  Latin)  in  an  additional 
number  of  advanced  subjects.  Moreover  in  history  he  has  a  choice 
between  American  and  English  history  and  the  history  of  Greece  and 
Eome  ;  and  in  physical  science  between  elementary  physics  and  as- 
tronomy learned  from  text-books  only,  and  experimental  physics 
learned  in  the  laboratory.  In  elementary  Greek,  Latin,  German, 
and  French  he  is  not  tied  to  any  particular  authors,  but  is  asked  to 
show  his  ability  to  translate  simple  prose  passages  at  sight.  In 
English  he  is  required  to  write  a  composition  upon  a  subject  taken 
from  one  of  several  specified  books,  most  of  which — if  he  has 
literary  taste  —  he  has  probably  read  before  being  required  to  do  so. 
For  an  exact  statement  of  the  existing  requirements  for  admission 


12 

the  candidate  should  invariably  consult  the  University  Catalogue, 
but  the  following  details  maj^  serve  to  give  an  idea  of  what  a  Harvard 
student  is  expected  to  learn  before  entering  College. 

Elementary  Studies. 

English.  —  The  first  part  of  the  examination  in  English  is  based 
upon  selected  works  of  standard  English  authors.  The  list  of  books 
changes  from  year  to  year,  the  announcement  of  the  changes  being 
published  several  ^^ears  in  advance.  The  student  should  read  the  pre- 
scribed books  as  he  reads  other  books  ;  he  will  be  expected,  not  to 
know  them  minutely,  but  to  have  freshly  in  mind  their  most  important 
parts.  He  may  be  asked  to  write  an  outline  of  a  specified  novel  or  to 
explain  the  purport  of  an  essay. 

Whatever  the  subject  of  the  composition,  the  examiner  will  regard 
knowledge  of  the  book  as  far  less  important  than  ability  to  write 
English.  The  student  should  therefore  have  constant  practice  in 
writing,  and  should  test  his  work  severely.  He  should  spell  correctly 
and  punctuate  intelligently.  He  should  make  sure  —  so  far  as  he 
can  — that  every  word  means  something,  and  the  right  thing;  that 
every  sentence  is  grammatical ;  and  that  thought  follows  thought  in 
logical  order.  He  should  do  his  best  to  make  his  work  accurate  in 
every  part,  and  to  combine  the  parts  in  a  coherent  whole. 

The  student  may  train  himself  for  the  correction  of  specimens  of 
bad  English  —  the  second  part  of  the  examination  —  (a)  by  correcting 
his  own  work ;  {h)  by  correcting  the  specimens  of  bad  English  in 
some  elementary  text-book.  * 

In  preparation  for  both  parts  of  the  examination,  he  should  study 
the  elements  of  grammar  and  rhetoric  ;  and  should  apply  what  he 
learns  (a)  to  his  own  writing  ;  (6)  to  specimen  pages  of  the  pre- 
scribed books. 

Greek.  —  The  examination  in  Elementary  Greek  tests  the  candi- 
date's ability  to  translate  simple  Attic  prose  at  sight.  In  order  to 
meet  this  requirement  the  candidate  must  possess  a  good  practical 
knowledge  of  the  forms  and  constructions  of  the  language  and  must 
have  command  of  a  considerable  vocabulary.  The  essential  forms 
and  ordinary  constructions  should  be  thoroughly  mastered.  From 
the  beginning,  practical  use  should  be  made  of  the  knowledge  ac- 
quired by  translating  Greek  into  English  and  English  into  Greek, 
first  single  detached  sentences  and  then,  as  soon  as  possible,  con- 
nected passages.     The  acquisition  of  a  vocabulary  should  be  system- 

*  Such,  for  example,  as  Exercises  in  English  by  H.  I.  Strang.  Boston  :  D.  C. 
Heath  &  Co. 


13 

atically  pursued.  Important  words  should  be  daily  committed  to 
memory,  not  as  separate  units,  but  with  regard  to  their  affinity  in 
form  and  meaning.  These  groups  of  related  words  will  grow  from 
lesson  to  lesson.  In  acquiring  the  elements  of  the  language  some 
such  help  should  be  resorted  to  as  The  Beginner's  Greek  Book,  pub- 
lished by  Ginn  &  Company,  Boston,  which  supplies  materials  and 
indicates  the  method. 

When  the  elements  have  been  acquired,  the  pupil  should  read  ex- 
tensively in  Xeuophon,  the  most  of  whose  writings  are  accessible  in 
good  school  editions.  He  should  be  required  to  read  aloud,  and 
should  be  taught  to. depend,  in  reading,  upon  his  own  res-ources  so  far 
as  possible.  He  should  commit  the  new  words  that  he  meets  to 
memory,  and  should  confirm  his  knowledge  of  forms  and  construc- 
tions b}^  systematic  use  of  a  grammar.  He  should  aim  to  learn  to 
read  freely  and  with  ease,  but  always  exactly.  The  total  amount 
read  in  preparation  for  the  examination  should  not  be  less  than  three 
hundred  or  four  hundred  pages. 

Latin.  —  The  examination  in  Elementary  Latin  demands  of  the 
candidate  ability  to  read  simple  prose  which  he  has  not  read  before. 
This  is  the  main  requirement ;  but  to  enforce  thoroughness  and  ex- 
actness in  the  candidate's  training,  questions  on  the  ordinary  forms 
and  constructions  of  the  language  are  appended  to  the  passages  set 
for  translation.  Thorough  preparation  for  this  examination  requires, 
for  the  average  student,  a  three-years  course,  and  this  is  the  time 
usually  given  to  it;  some  of  the  best  schools  give  even  more.  The 
student's  training  should  be  of  the  same  general  character  as  that 
recommended  in  Greek.  The  author  most  commonly  read  is  Caesar ; 
but  others,  such  as  Nepos  and  Quintus  Curtius,  may  be  used  advan- 
tageously for  supplementary  reading.  Pupils  from  the  best  schools 
have  also  usually  read  selections  from  Ovid  or  a  few  books  of  the 
Aeneid  by  the  time  they  take  the  elementary  examinations,  although 
ability  to  read  these  authors  is  not  required. 

German. — A  student  who  wishes  to  fit  himself  to  pass  the  ele- 
mentary examination  in  German  for  admission  to  Harvard  College 
should  first  master  so  much  of  the  grammar  as  is  contained  in  Shel- 
don's "  Short  Grammar."  He  is  advised  to  give  especial  attention 
from  the  beginning  to  the  rules  for  pronunciation.  The  study  of  the 
Grammar  should  be  accompanied  by  the  careful  reading  of  at  least 
two  hundred  duodecimo  pages  of  easy  German  ;  such  as  Grimm's 
Fairy  Tales,  or  the  easier  stories  of  Hej^se,  Storm,  and  Zschokke. 
There  are  several  German  readers  which  have  good  selections  for 
beginners.     Among   others   may  be   mentioned :    Grauert's   Reader 


14 

(E.  Steiger,  New  York),  Joynes'  Reader  (D.  C.  Heath  &  Co.,  Bos- 
ton), Whitney's  Reader  (Henry  Holt  &  Co.,  New  York).  The  stu- 
dent is  advised  to  give  himself  a  good  deal  of  practice  in  reading  "  at 
sight"  ;  that  is  to  say,  as  soon  as  he  has  mastered  a  small  vocabu- 
lary he  should  try  to  make  out,  without  too  constant  use  of  the  dic- 
tionary, the  meaning  of  easy  sentences  which  are  new  to  him.  A 
good  book  for  practice  in  reading  at  sight  is  Leander's  Traumereien 
(D.  C.  Heath  &  Co.,  Boston). 

The  one  point  in  grammatical  study  which  will  best  help  the  stu- 
dent to  read  at  sight  is  a  thorough  mastery  of  all  the  irregular  (or 
*'  strong  ")  verbs. 

French. — To  prepare  for  the  elementary  examination  in  French, 
the  student  should  use  such  books  as  Chardenal's  first  and  second 
French  courses  and  (in  case  he  is  working  without  the  aid  of  a  com- 
petent teacher)  the  keys  to  the  exercises  of  the  same.  A  student 
working  without  a  teacher  should  write  the  exercises,  then  correct 
them  with  the  help  of  the  key,  and  write  them  over  again  a  few  days 
later  without  looking  at  the  first  draft.  Not  less  than  five  hundred 
pages  of  French  should  be  read.  The  best  books  to  begin  with  are 
readers,  such  as  Bdcher's  French  Reader,  or  Macmillan's  Second  Pro- 
gressive French  Reader ;  then  easy  novels  and  plays,  such  as  I'Abbe 
Constantin,  by  Ludovic  Halevy  ;  la  Poudre  aux  Yeux,  and  le  Voj'age 
de  M.  Perrichon,  by  Labiche.  Excellent,  as  well  as  easy,  historical 
reading  will  be  provided  by  the  Charles  XII.  of  Voltaire.  It  is 
essential  that  some  idea  of  the  pronunciation  should  be  obtained 
from  some  one  fairly  conversant  with  the  French  language.  Gose's 
French-English  and  English-French  Dictionary  will  be  found  at  least 
as  convenient  as  any. 

History. — The  requirement  in  history  is  intended  to  call  for  a 
substantial  piece  of  work,  equal  to  that  demanded  in  any  other  sub- 
ject occupying  one  hour  on  the  examination  programme.  The  books 
named  in  the  Catalogue  to  "indicate  the  amount  of  knowledge 
demanded ' '  represent  the  minimum  of  fact  which  a  candidate  is 
expected  to  master.  The  preparation  should  be  such  as  to  enable 
the  pupil  to  use  his  facts.  The  "  additional  readings  "  are  therefore 
particularly  recommended,  showing  how  to  reason  from  facts,  and 
the  larger  the  amount  of  reading  which  is  thoughtfully  done,  the 
greater  will  be  the  number  of  things  which  the  pupil  remembers 
because  he  is  interested  in  them.  The  best  method  of  instruction  is 
to  use  a  text-book  as  a  guide,  and  to  require  pupils  from  day  to  day 
to  read  the  "additional  readings"  and  like  works  giving  other 
accounts  of  the  same  events  or  institutions.     Care  should  be  taken 


15 

that  pupils  should  i-emember  the  ideas  of  the  books,  but  state  them 
in  their  own  words.  Much  may  be  accomplished  by  distributing 
topics  among  the  members  of  the  class  for  special  preparation,  the 
best  of  them  to  be  reported  to  the  class.  In  such  cases  the  teacher 
should  take  care  that  every  pupil  masters  also  the  general  lesson. 
The  teacher  will  find  it  useful  to  his  pupils  frequently  to  set  them  ques- 
tions, so  put  as  to  make  each  one  think  about  and  combine  for  him- 
self the  facts  with  which  he  is  dealing.  Answers  should  be  written. 
Candidates  studying  by  themselves  should  read  text-books  and  addi- 
tional readings  carefully,  reviewing  at  times  by  taking  up  such  com- 
pendiums  as  Ploetz's  Epitome,  and  trying  to  bring  together  from 
memory  the  causes  and  results  of  events  mentioned.  The  geography 
ma}^  be  best  learned  by  the  use  of  outline  maps,  boundaries  being 
drawn  and  places  located  from  memory. 

Mathematics. — A  thorough,  practical  acquaintance  with  ordinary 
arithmetic  is  assumed  as  underlying  all  preparation  in  Mathematics. 
Bui:  no  examination  is  held  in  arithmetic ;  and  students  are  advised 
not  to  waste  their  time  on  merely  puzzling  problems,  which  can  be 
better  solved  by  algebra,  or  on  the  details  of  commercial  arithmetic. 
The  "four  rules,"  the  operations  on  vulgar  and  decimal  fractions, 
the  simpler  reductions  and  combinations  of  compound  numbers,  and 
the  extraction  of  the  square  root  ought,  however,  to  be  thoroughly 
understood,  in  such  a  manner  as  to  be  easily  and  accurately  worked 
out ;  for  these  afford  the  necessary  basis  of  mathematical  knowledge. 

The  examinations  in  elementary  algebra  and  plane  geometry  re- 
quire not  only  accurate  knowledge  of  those  subjects,  but  the  practical 
power  —  which  can  easily  be  gained  by  training  —  to  use  that  knowl- 
edge in  the  solution  of  new  problems  and  examples.  Memory  is  in- 
dispensable here  as  elsewhere  ;  but  in  Mathematics,  its  part  should 
be  as  small  as  possible.  The  student  should  strive  to  attain  a 
firm  hold  of  the  reasons  involved  in  the  demonstrations,  solutions, 
constructions,  rules,  and  methods  presented  to  him  ;  to  remember 
those  reasons  through  the  force  with  which  they  are  impressed  on 
his  mind  ;  and  to  remember  the  details  of  his  subject,  because  he 
remembers  their  reasons.  This  requires  earnest,  patient,  concen- 
trated study ;  but  the  habit  once  formed.  Mathematics  becomes 
eas}^,  and  the  student  can  enter  a  mathematical  examination  with 
confidence. 

The  list  of  subjects  in  algebra,  given  in  the  Announcement  of 
Requirements,  should  be  carefully  considered ;  and  the  student 
should  not  fail  to  cover  the  whole  ground  there  specified.  A  large 
number  of  examples  should  be  solved ;    so  that   the   student  may 


16 

learn  to  do  his  work  with  reasonable  quickness,  as  well  as  with  clear- 
ness, facility,  and  exactness.  The  examination  aims  to  test  all  these 
qualities.  The  solution  of  tolerably  complicated  literal  quadratics ; 
the  various  methods  of  elimination,  for  equations  of  the  first  two 
degrees  ;  the  putting  of  problems,  in  a  neat  manner,  into  equations ; 
the  working  of  all  the  algebraic  operations  both  for  integral  and  for 
fractional  expressions  :  —  may  be  specially  pointed  out  as  important 
subjects  of  attention.  The  student  should  learn  to  arrange  his  work 
in  a  clear,  orderly,  and  compact  fashion.  Wentworth's  Elementary 
Algebra  (Ginn  &  Co.,  Boston)  is  widely  and  successfully  used  by 
schools  which  prepare  for  this  College.  But  any  reputable  text-book, 
if  it  is  well  provided  with  examples  and  covers  the  whole  ground 
required,  may  be  employed.  Wentworth's  College  Algebra  (same 
publishers).  Chaps.  X.  and  XI.  ;  Todhunter's  Algebra  (Macmillan  & 
Co.,  New  York),  Chaps.  VI.-VIIL,  XIII.,  XVIII. ,  XIX.,  XXI.- 
XXIV.,  inclusive;  and  Wentworth  and  Hill's  Exercise  and  Exam- 
ination Manuals  (Ginn  &  Co.)  contain  good  examples  for  practice. 

In  Geometry,  the  student  should  guard  against  committing  his 
demonstrations  and  solutions  to  memory  from  his  text-book.  He 
should,  so  far  as  possible,  work  them  out  for  himself,  with  his  own 
diagrams,  using  the  book  as  a  guide,  and  alwaj^s  bearing  in  mind 
that  his  object  is  to  learn  a  subject,  not  a  particular  author's  present- 
ation of  that  subject.  He  should  make  his  diagrams  as  different  from 
those  drawn  in  his  book  as  the  conditions  of  the  question  allow  ;  he 
should  often  use  different  lettering  from  the  book  ;  and  sometimes 
try  to  invent  proofs  and  solutions  of  his  own,  remembering  always 
that  the  shortest  and  simplest  methods,  if  rigorous,  are  best.  This 
way  of  working  will  help  him  towards  the  solution  of  original  prob- 
lems, on  which  he  should  carefuU}^  prepare  himself.  It  is  an  excel- 
lent practice  to  perform  many  actual  constructions  with  the  rule  and 
compasses,  according  to  geometric  principles,  and  with  the  utmost 
care  and  finish.  The  student  thus  becomes  familiar  with  the  condi- 
tions of  the  possibility  of  a  construction  and  with  the  actual  use  of 
theorems ;  and  acquires  a  greater  interest  in  his  stud}^  But  he 
should  remember  that  a  fine  drawing,  however  useful  in  its  own  way, 
has  no  geometric  value  ;  it  is  unnecessary  to  a  sound  demonstration 
and  is  powerless  to  redeem  a  faulty  one.  Byerly's  Chauvenet's 
Geometry  (Lippincott  Co.,  Philadelphia)  is  to  be  strongly  recom- 
mended as  a  suitable  text-book  ;  Wentworth's  Geometry  (Ginn  & 
Co.,  Boston)  may  also  be  favorably  mentioned;  but,  as  in  algebra, 
any  standard  treatise  ma}^  be  chosen.  In  addition  to  the  regular 
text-books,  Julius  Petersen's  "Methods  and  Theories  for  the  Solu- 
tion of  Problems  etc."  (Sampson  Low  &  Co.,  London)  may  be  used 


17 

with  advantage  by  the  student  who  has  the  time  and  inclination  to 
make  special  studies  in  the  art  of  geometric  invention. 

One  third  of  one  full  year  of  work  may  be  taken  to  represent  the 
time  devoted  to  the  study  of  elementary  algebra  at  good  schools  ; 
and  one  fifth  of  a  3'ear,  the  time  devoted  to  plane  geometry.  A 
capable  and  somewhat  mature  student  may  prepare  himself  satisfac- 
torily for  the  examinations  in  decidedly  less  time  ;  but,  on  the  other 
hand,  the  student  who  can  give  more  study  to  plane  geometry  espe- 
cially is  strongly  advised  to  do  so.  A  thorough  master}-  of  either  of 
these  subjects,  on  which  all  higher  study  of  Mathematics  depends, 
and  which  contribute  indirectly  in  an  important  degree  to  a  vigorous 
mental  training,  necessarily  requires  time  for  the  assimilation  of  the 
new  conceptions  and  processes  which  characterize  them,  and  for  the 
formation  of  habits  of  exact  thought. 

Elementary  Physics. — Previous  to  1886  the  only  requirement  in 
physics  for  admission  to  Harvard  College  was  text-book  work.  In 
that  year  and  the  year  following  a  pamphlet  was  prepared  by  the 
College  describing  in  detail  a  laboratory  course  intended  as  an  alter- 
native for  the  text-book  course.  A  candidate  for  admission  may 
therefore  now  offer  either  a  text-book  course  or  a  laboratory  course. 
The  laboratory  course  is  strongly  recommended  to  all  who  can  take  it. 

The  text-book  alternative  is  retained  because  the  teaching  of  phys- 
ics by  laboratory  methods*  has  not  yet  become  general  in  the  schools 
of  the  country  at  large.  Concerning  this  requirement  nothing  need 
be  added  to  the  statement  of  the  College  Catalogue,  which  is  as  fol- 
lows :  Astronomy  (Lockyer's  Elementary  Lessons)  and  Physics 
(Avery's  Elements  of  Natural  Philosophy*  or  Gage's  Elements  of 
Physics) .  This  requirement,  if  fully  and  thoroughly  met,  probably 
imposes  as  much  work  upon  the  student  as  the  laboratory-  alternative. 

Inquiry  has  shown  that  in  a  considerable  number  of  the  best  schools 
which  fit  for  Harvard  College  about  five  school-hours  per  week,  pre- 
sumably with  some  hours  each  week  out  of  school,  for  one  year  were 
devoted  to  physics.  Accordingly,  the  laboratory  course  described  in 
the  pamphlet  was  planned  to  occupy  the  student,  in  school  and  out, 
about  seven  or  eight  hours  per  week  for  one  year. 

As  physics  is  no  longer  a  required  study  in  college,  it  was  borne 
in  mind,  in  planning  the  laboratory  course  for  the  schools,  that  very 
many  of  those  taking  it  would  never  have  any  other  systematic  course 
in  physics.     Accordingly  the  exercises  were  so  chosen  as  to  cover  a 

*  The  following  portions  of  the  1885  edition  may  be  omitted  :  —  sections  I.  and 
II.  of  chap.  I.  (excepting  arts.  23-30),  arts.  254-267,  346-349,  371,  411-416, 
445-455,  464-467,  470-476,  707-714,  729-745,  and  the  whole  Appendix. 


18 

wide  range  of  subjects  and  to  have  many  applications  in  the  experi- 
ence of  every-day  life.  The  course  at  its  last  revision,  in  1889,  was. 
arranged  in  forty-six  exercises,  any  six  of  which  may  be  omitted  by 
the  candidate.  The  examination  for  those  who  present  this  course 
consists  of  a  written  test  upon  questions  closely  connected  with  the 
work  of  the  course,  a  laboratory  examination,  usually  upon  the  exer- 
cises of  the  course,  and  an  examination  of  the  note-books  used  during 
the  progress  of  the  course  in  the  schools.  The  written  examination, 
though  less  important  than  the  other  two,  and  comparatively  easy, 
gives  valuable  evidence  as  to  the  intelligence  with  which  the  student 
has  carried  on  his  work  and  the  thoroughness  with  which  he  has 
mastered  its  principles. 

Particular  attention  has  been  given  to  the  question  of  pecuniary 
expense  in  the  arrangement  of  the  laboratory  course,  and  with  such 
success  that  the  course  is  fully  established  in  most  of  the  schools  that 
send  many  students  to  Harvard  and  is  gradually  making  its  way  into 
smaller  schools.  The  pamphlet  describing  this  course  is  called  a 
Descriptive  List  of  Elementary  Physical  Experiments.  It  is  for  sale 
at  the  University  Bookstore,  Cambridge. 

Advanced  Studies. 

Considerably  more  advanced  training  is  also  required  in  from  two 
to  five  of  the  following  subjects  :  Greek,  Latin,  German,  French, 
mathematics,  physics,  chemistr}'.  If  Greek  is  omitted  from  among; 
the  elementary  subjects,  four  of  these  advanced  subjects  instead  of 
two  must  be  offered,  and  they  must  include  a  considerable  part  of 
the  advanced  mathematics  and  sciences.  For  a  precise  statement, 
of  the  omissions  from  the  elementary  list  and  the  corresponding; 
substitutions  from  the  advanced  list  the  student  must  consult  the 
Catalogue. 

There  are  many  schools  which  are  not  prepared  to  furnish  even 
their  best  and  most  ambitious  pupils  with  all  the  training  which 
these  requirements  demand  ;  nevertheless  the  number  of  schools  and 
small  colleges  which  fit  students  for  Harvard  College  is  large,  as  will 
be  seen  by  consulting  the  Appendix,  and  might  be  much  larger  if 
pupils  and  their  parents  insisted  upon  having  school  facilities  in- 
creased in  localities  where  incompetent  teachers  and  meagre  expendi- 
tures are  not  necessary  evils.  The  best  fitting  schools  for  Harvard 
College  are  those  which  the  table  in  the  Appendix  shows  to  have 
prepared  the  largest  number  of  successful  candidates  in  recent 
years. 

It  does  not  necessarily  follow  because  a  candidate  for  admission 
has  been  poorly  prepared  in  one  or  two  subjects,  owing  to  lack  of 


19 

competent  instruction,  that  tie  cannot  enter  Harvard.  If,  by  passing 
creditably  in  the  subjects  in  which  he  has  been  trained,  he  clearly 
shows  capacity  and  ambition,  he  will  be  admitted  on  condition  of 
subsequently  making  up  his  deficienc}^  The  number  of  subjects  in 
which  he  may  be  conditioned  varies  according  to  the  circumstances, 
but  does  not  usually  exceed  three.  After  entering  College  he 
is  allowed  to  cancel  these  conditions,  either  by  passing  examina- 
tions on  the  same  subjects  or  by  taking  as  a  part  of  his  college 
studies  advanced  work  in  the  same  department,  the  satisfactory 
performance  of  which  proves  that  he  has  more  than  made  good  his 
previous  defects.  The  exact  number  of  conditions  allowed  can 
never  be  stated  in  advance  for  the  reason  that  each  case  is  consid- 
ered on  its  merits. 

It  frequently  happens  that  students  who  do  not  feel  that  they  can 
devote  four  years  to  college  study  as  candidates  for  the  degree  of 
A.B.  desire  to  pursue  special  work  leading  to  some  chosen  goal. 
Such  persons  can  obtain  instruction  at  Harvard  by  entering  as  spe- 
cial students.  Before  the  opening  of  the  college  year  an  applicant 
files  with  the  Secretary  a  written  application  in  which  his  previous 
training  and  future  plans  are  outlined  ;  and  he  accompanies  this  with 
letters  from  teachers  and  friends  testifying  to  his  character  and 
capacity.  These  papers  are  read  by  a  committee  of  the  Facult}^, 
and  if  found  satisfactory  the  candidate  is  allowed  to  register  as  a 
Special  Student  and  to  begin  work  in  such  courses  as  he  may  select 
with  the  approval  of  his  advisers.  If  his  subsequent  conduct  shows 
that  he  is  either  not  studious  or  of  doubtful  character,  he  is  deprived 
of  the  privileges  of  the  University. 

The  process  of  admission  to  regular  standing  and  recognized  can- 
didacy for  a  degree  is  more  complicated.  Most  students  prefer  to 
divide  their  admission  examination  into  two  parts,  taking  one  part 
in  one  year  and  the  remainder  the  next.  Sometimes  they  take  one 
part  in  June  and  the  other  in  September.  Under  no  circumstances 
are  they  allowed  to  divide  their  examinations*  into  more  than  two 
such  parts.  Where  the  division  is  between  two  years,  the  first  part 
is  called  the  Preliminary  Examination.  In  order  to  be  recognized  as 
a  preliminary  candidate  a  student  must  send  to  the  Secretary  a  clear 
and  explicit  statement  from  the  head-master  of  his  school,  expressing 
the  master's  belief  that  the  student  is  properly  prepared  to  take  cer- 
tain preliminary  examinations  which  the  certificate  must  specify. 
Until  this  certificate  is  received  by  the  Secretarj^  the  candidate  is  not 
entitled  to  enter  the  examination.  Of  course  this  does  not  prevent 
students  of  limited  opportunities  from  "offering  themselves"  in 
cases  where  they  are  in  fact  preparing  themselves  for  college  ;  but 


20 

in  such  cases  the  candidate  must  state  that  he  is  his  own  teacher  and 
send  an  exact  list  of  the  studies  in  which  he  believes  himself  prepared 
to  undergo  examination. 

The  second  set  of  examinations  of  a  candidate  who  divides  between 
two  3'ears  is  called  the  "Finals."  It  may  follow  the  "Preliminaries  " 
after  an  interval  of  a  year,  a  year  and  three  months,  or  even  two  or 
more  years.  Where  all  the  examinations  are  offered  in  the  same 
year,  whether  part  in  June  or  part  in  September  or  all  at  once,  they 
also  are  called  "  Finals  "  for  the  reason  that  each  examination  taken, 
whether  in  June  or  September,  is  the  final  effort  of  the  candidate  to 
pass  in  that  particular  subject.  Candidates  for  the  "Finals"  are 
not  required  to  present  certificates  of  preparation.  The  penalty  for 
trying  all  the  examinations  in  one  year,  when  preparation  has  been 
insufficient  and  when  such  insufficiency  is  proved  by  failure,  is  that 
the  candidate  obtains  no  certificate  for  the  subjects  passed  and  is 
compelled  to  take  the  entire  examination  over  again.  The  knowledge 
of  the  penalty  is  usually  sufficient  to  prevent  incompetent  persotis 
from  undertaking  the  examinations  all  at  once  against  their  teachers' 
advice.  The  only  certificate  required  of  a  final  candidate  is  one  of 
good  moral  character.  This  should  always  come  from  the  principal 
of  his  school,  or,  if  he  has  not  had  a  regular  school  training,  from  a 
clergyman  or  other  responsible  person  well  known  in  the  locality 
where  he  resides.  If  a  student  cannot  show  that  he  is  trusted  and 
respected  in  his  school  and  home,  he  is  not  desired  in  Harvard  Col- 
lege. Any  attempt  to  force  a  person  of  tainted  character  into  the 
midst  of  the  University  community  is  considered  to  be  an  act  deserv- 
ing the  strongest  condemnation. 

The  June  examinations  for  admission  to  Harvard  are  held  simul- 
taneously in  Cambridge  and  other  points  in  New  England ;  in  New 
York,  Albany,  and  Buffalo  ;  in  Philadelphia,  A¥ashington,  Cincinnati, 
Cleveland,  Chicago,  St.  Louis,  Minneapolis,  Denver,  San  Francisco, 
Portland,  Oregon ;  Tokyo,  and  some  accessible  city  in  Europe. 
An  examination  will  ordinarily  be  held  at  any  other  point  distant 
from  those  named,  if  ten  candidates  apply  for  it  as  early  as  April  1. 
In  order  to  enable  the  College  to  know  how  many  candidates  are 
to  be  provided  for  at  each  of  the  regular  places  of  examination, 
notice  of  intention  to  take  examinations  in  places  outside  of  Cam- 
bridge must  be  sent  to  the  Secretary  in  time  to  reach  him  by  June 
11th.  If  the  examinations  are  taken  in  Cambridge,  no  fee  is 
charged ;  but,  if  taken  elsewhere,  payment  of  $5  is  required  to 
be  made  to  the  Bursar  as  early  as  June  11th.  The  payment 
should  be  made  by  check  or  money-order  drawn  to  the  order  of  the 


21 

Bursar.  Money  should  not  be  trusted  to  the  mail.  The  check  should 
be  sent  to  the  Bursar  direct  and  not  under  cover  to  any  other  officer. 
One  fee  covers  both  "Preliminaries"  and  "Finals"  and  the  two 
sets  of  examinations  need  not  be  taken  in  the  same  place.  Full 
details  regarding  the  examinations,  including  sets  of  papers  used  in 
previous  years,  are  furnished  by  the  Secretary  on  request. 

A  candidate  for  admission  to  Harvard  by  the  usual  process  of 
examination  will  find  no  difficulty  in  taking  his  examinations,  pro- 
vided he  notes  with  reasonable  care  the  directions  given  him  by  the 
officers  in  charge.  There  is  no  need  for  any  well-prepared  candidate 
to  feel  nervous  or  timid.  He  is  one  of  hundreds  passing  through  the 
same  ordeal,  all  equally  new  to  the  situation  which  challenges  their 
courage.  If  he  is  really  prepared  to  enter  College,  the  College  is 
quite  ready  to  admit  him.  The  examination-books  will  be  read  and 
passed  upon  in  ignorance  of  his  identity,  and  the  utmost  impartiality 
will  be  shown  in  judging  his  efforts  at  each  stage  of  his  progress. 
Honesty  in  examinations  is  unquestionably  the  rule  at  Harvard. 
Opportunities  to  "  crib  "  are  few  ;  public  opinion  is  against  cheating 
of  any  kind ;  and  dishonesty,  if  detected,  deprives  the  candidate  of 
the  chance  to  enter  College. 

Information  regarding  the  results  of  the  June  examinations  is 
given  to  final  candidates  within  a  day  or  two  after  the  close  of  the 
examinations  and  to  preliminary  candidates  about  ten  days  later. 
The  autumn  examinations  are  over  several  days  before  College  opens, 
so  that  persons  admitted  then  have  time  to  get  settled  before  attend- 
ance at  lectures  begins.  Admission  or  preliminary  certificates  are  as 
good  one  or  more  years  after  date  as  when  issued,  but  dela}^  in  enter- 
ing College  is  not  favored. 

Mention  has  already  been  made  of  admission  to  advanced  stand- 
ing in  the  college  classes.  This  may  be  obtained  by  examination  or 
through  recognition  of  work  well  done  at  another  college.  The  usual 
process  where  a  student  at  another  college  wishes  to  be  transferred 
to  Harvard,  is  for  him  to  fill  out  a  blank  furnished  by  the  Secretary, 
stating  in  detail  all  his  previous  work  in  fitting  for  college  and  after 
entering  it.  This  he  supports  by  certificates  and  rank-lists  showing 
his  class-standing,  and  forwards  them  through  the  Secretary  to  the 
Committee  on  Admission  from  other  Colleges.  After  allowing  full 
credit  for  all  his  work  as  measured  by  Harvard  standards,  this  Com- 
mittee decides  in  which  of  the  four  college  classes  the  candidate 
belongs.  It  occasionally,  though  rarel}',  happens  that  students  com- 
ing from  the  same  class  at  home  are  admitted  to  different  standings 
in  Harvard  College,  owing  to  marked  diff'erence  in  their  scholarship 
or  preparatory  training.     Any  student  of  limited  means  and  high 


22 


scholarship  who  is  transferred  by  the  recommendation  of  his  teachers 
from  another  college  to  Harvard,  is  likel}^  to  receive  favorable  answer 
to  an  application  for  aid  from  the  Price  Greenleaf  fund.  His  appli- 
cation must  be  filed  before  May  1.  The  amount  given  varies  from 
$150  to  $250.  Applications  for  admission  to  advanced  standing 
are  promptly  considered  at  any  time  in  the  year,  summer  included. 
During  the  past  nine  years  over  325  students  from  other  colleges 
have  entered  the  undergraduate  classes  in  Harvard  College.  They 
have  come  from  the  following  institutions  —  one  hundred  and  eleven 
in  number :  — 


Acadia, 

Adel  )ert, 

Albion, 

Amherst, 

Andover  Theol.  Semi- 
nary, 

Atlanta, 

Augustana, 

Beloit, 

Bethany, 

Blackburn, 

Boston  College, 

Boston  University, 

Bowdoin, 

Bridgewater  State  Nor- 
mal, 

Brooklyn  Polytechnic  In- 
stitute, 

Brown, 

Bucknell, 

Cambridge  Epis.  Theol. 
School, 

Carleton, 

Charleston, 

Colby, 

College  of  the  City  of 
New  York, 

Columbia, 

Columbian, 

Cornell  (N.Y.), 

Cornell  (Iowa), 

Dalhousie, 

Dartmouth, 

Denison, 

Drury, 

Eminence, 

Emporia, 

Eureka, 

Fisk, 

Frankfurt  Gymnasium, 

Genesoo  State  Normal, 


Georgetown, 

Grinnell, 

Grove  City, 

Hamilton, 

Hamline, 

Haverford, 

Hillsdale, 

Hobart, 

Holy  Cross, 

Howard  College  (Ala.), 

Howard  University, 

Illinois  State  Normal, 

Illinois  Wesleyan, 

Iowa  State  University, 

Kenyon, 

Knox, 

Lafayette, 

Lawrence, 

Lebanon  Valley, 

London, 

Madison, 

Marietta, 

Mass.  Institute  of  Tech- 
nology, 

Millersville  State  Normal, 

Mt.  Allison, 

National  Normal  Univer- 
sity (Lebanon,  Ohio), 

Nortliern  Indiana  Nor- 
mal, 

Northwestern, 

Oberlin, 

Oliio  State  University, 

Ohio  Wesleyan, 

Otterbein, 

Princeton, 

Racine, 

Ripon, 

Roanoke, 

Rochester, 

St.  Francis, 


St.  Lawrence, 

St.  Stephen's, 

Simpson, 

South  Carolina, 

SouthwesternPresbyterian, 

Stevens  Inst,  of  Technol., 

Swarthmore, 

Syracuse, 

Trinity, 

Tufts, 

Tulane, 

Union  Theol.  Seminary, 

University  of  Alabama, 
"  "  California, 

"  "  Georgia, 

"  "  Indiana, 

"  "  Kansas, 

"  "  Michigan, 

"  "  Missouri, 

"  "  New    Bruns- 

wick, 
"  "  North    Caro- 

lina, 
"  "  Ore,<.'on, 

"  "Pennsylvania, 

"  "  Vermont, 

"  "  Virginia, 

"  "  Wisconsin, 

U.  S.  Naval  Academy, 

Vanderbilt, 

Wartburg, 

Washington, 

Washington  and  Jefferson, 

Wesleyan, 

Williams, 

Wittenberg, 

Wooster, 

Worcester  Polytechnic  In- 
stitute, 

Yale. 


23 

A  graduate  of  another  college  who  wishes  to  take  the  degree  of 
Bachelor  of  Arts  at  Harvard  College  may  register  either  as  an  under- 
graduate or  as  a  member  of  the  Graduate  School.  The  same  courses 
of  instruction  are  open  to  him  in  either  case  and  the  requirements 
imposed  for  the  degree  will  be  the  same. 

Students  entering  with  advanced  standing  are  enabled  by  special 
provisions  in  the  Regulations  to  compete  for  degrees  with  distinction 
and  for  Honors. 

The  college  year  opens  on  the  Thursday  following  the  last 
Wednesday  in  September.  On  entering  College  every  Freshman 
and  Special  Student  finds  himself  assigned  to  some  member  of 
the  Faculty  who  acts  as  his  adviser  in  the  selection  of  his  studies 
and  in  other  matters  relating  to  his  new  life.  The  student 
deposits  with  the  Bursar  either  a  bond  signed  by  two  satisfactory 
sureties  or  a  sum  of  money  sufficient  to  cover  his  immediate  future 
liabilities  ;  he  secures  a  seat  at  Memorial  Hall,  or  in  some  other 
boarding-place  ;  registers  in  the  morning  of  the  first  day  of  the  term, 
and  enrolls  himself  in  the  classes  of  the  professors  with  whom  he  is 
to  take  courses.  Thenceforward  his  duties  are  clear.  They  are, 
however,  looked  upon  by  the  University  as  duties  to  himself  and  his 
parents,  rather  than  to  the  College.  Every  student  is  at  the  outset 
presumed  to  have  come  to  Cambridge  for  the  purpose  of  gaining  an 
education.  If  he  seems  to  be  in  danger  of  forgetting  this  he  is 
warned  ;  later,  admonished  and  a  letter  sent  to  his  home  ;  then,  if 
the  presumption  of  good  purpose  is  negatived  by  conclusive  evidence 
of  his  unfitness  to  care  for  himself,  he  is  placed  on  probation,  cut  off 
from  many  privileges  and  honors,  and  informed  that  anj^  further 
neglect  of  work  will  result  in  his  ceasing  to  be  a  member  of  the 
University.  Students  who  reach  the  point  of  being  sent  away  are,  as 
a  rule,  manifestly  unfit  for  college  life.  In  the  rare  cases  of  actual 
misconduct,  the  penalties  of  suspension,  dismission,  and  expulsion 
are  enforced. 

The  work  of  the  Freshman  year  consists  of  sixteen  hours  a  week 
of  lectures  and  recitations,  not  counting  any  laboratory  or  field  work 
which  may  be  taken.  Most  of  the  courses  of  study  begin  in  Sep- 
tember and  continue  till  June.  Some  end  in  February  and  are  com- 
plementar}^  to  other  half-courses  beginning  then  and  continuing  till 
June.  The  j^ear  is  not  divided  into  terms  or  semesters,  but  is  a  unit 
in  itself.  Consequently  entering  College  in  the  middle  of  the  year  is 
unadvisable,  and  is  rarely  allowed  candidates  for  a  degree.  The  work 
of  the  three  later  years  of  the  college  course  consists  of  twelve  hours 
of  lectures  each  week  with  a  steadily-increasing  amount  of  laboratory 
work,  thesis  writing,  and  outside  reading  and   research.     By  special 


24 

consent  of  the  Faculty  a  considerable  number  of  students  do  the  work 
of  four  3'ears  in  three.  Such  persons  are  usually  above  the  average 
in  age  and  attainments  and  are  apt  to  be  of  limited  means.  Of  the 
eighteen  courses  of  study  required  for  the  degree  of  A.B.  only  two  are 
prescribed.  The  remainhig  sixteen  are  elective  and  are  chosen  from 
among  the  two  hundred  and  fifty  or  more  courses  offered  by  the  Faculty 
of  Arts  and  Sciences.  Of  these  about  fifty  are  open  to  election  by 
Freshmen.  The  departments  in  which  instruction  is  given  are  Semitic 
and  Indo-Iranian  languages,  Classics,  Modern  Languages  and  Litera- 
tures, Philosophy,  Political  Economy,  History,  Fine  Arts,  Music,  Math- 
ematics, Civil,  Topographical  and  Electrical  Engineering,  Physics, 
Chemistry,  Botany,  Zoology,  Geology,  and  American  Archaeology. 
While  in  one  sense  an  upper-classman  may  elect  an}^  of  these  courses, 
it  is  usually  the  case  that  his  previous  training  has  fitted  him  to  take 
only  a  limited  number  of  them,  the  advanced  and  technical  courses  in 
each  department  requiring  careful  elementary  training  to  be  pursued 
successfully.  The  Annual  Announcement  of  Courses  of  Instruction 
commonly  known  as  the  "  Elective  Pamphlet,"  and  descriptive 
pamplets  of  the  various  departments,  are  issued  in  May  of  each 
year,  and  contain  detailed  information  regarding  these  courses.  They 
may  be  obtained  at  any  time  upon  application  to  the  Secretary. 
During  the  year  instructors  in  the  various  courses  of  study  submit 
their  students  to  frequent  tests  to  ascertain  whether  they  are  pursu- 
ing their  work  systematically.  In  all,  except  laboratory  courses  or 
others  affording  constant  intercourse  between  instructors  and  stu- 
dents, a  written  examination  lasting  an  hour  is  the  commonest  form 
of  test.  Early  in  February  the  mid-year  examinations  are  held, 
continuing  for  a  fortnight.  Each  examination  lasts  three  hours  and 
covers  tlie  work  done  during  the  first  half-year.  In  June,  at  the 
close  of  the  year,  the  final  examinations  are  held.  They  are  similar 
in  character  to  the  "  mid-years,"  both  being  written  examinations. 

After  the  final  examinations  Instructors  return  grades  based  upon 
the  student's  work  for  the  3"ear  and  these  grades  determine  whether 
students  are  promoted  or  "dropped."  A  "dropped"  student  is, 
under  the  rules,  on  probation  at  the  opening  of  the  next  Academic 
year,  and  is  sometimes  obliged  to  report  daily  to  a  tutor  or  officer  of 
the  University  until  his  period  of  probation  is  over.  The  results  of 
the  year's  work  are  made  known  during  the  summer  by  printed  rank- 
lists  containing  the  names  of  the  high  scholars  in  each  course,  and 
by  private  letters,  stating  the  low  grades. 

President  Eliot,  in  his  Annual  Report  for  the  year  1888-89,  made 
the  following  statement  regarding  "dropping  "  : 

"There  is  a  common  impression  among  ill-informed   people  that 


25 

Harvard  College,  although  hard  to  get  into,  is  easy  to  stay  in.  How 
erroneous  this  impression  is  may  be  seen  every  3^ear  in  the  figures 
published  in  the  Dean's  annual  report  concerning  the  changes  in  the 
personnel  of  the  successive  College  classes.  .  Thus  in  October,  1888, 
it  appears  from  the  Dean's  statistics  for  the  year  1888-89  (p.  39) 
that  the  Freshman,  Sophomore,  and  Junior  classes  numbered  together 
825  persons,  and  that  of  this  number  57  left  College  at  or  before  the 
end  of  the  year,  and  42  were  dropped  to  a  lower  class.  In  other 
words,  it  appears  that  one  person  in  nine  failed  to  maintain  his  place 
in  the  College.  '  The  majority  of  those  who  leave  College  altogether 
withdraw  voluntarily  ;  but  they  do  so  because  they  become  satisfied 
after  trial  that  they  have  not  health  or  capacity  enough  to  meet  the 
demands  of  the  College,  or,  if  they  are  poor,  that  their  chances  of 
success  in  College  work  are  too  slight  to  warrant  them  in  incurring 
debt.  The  Dean  points  out  with  satisfaction  that  while  42  students 
were  dropped  in  1888-89,  34  students  who  had  been  dropped  in 
former  j'ears  succeeded  in  making  good  the  deficiencies  which  had 
caused  them  to  be  dropped.  The  success  of  College  discipline  is  to 
be  best  judged,  not  by  the  number  of  the  lost,  but  by  the  number  of 
the  redeemed." 

Immediately  after  the  final  examinations  in  June  comes  the  Seniors' 
Class-Day  and  a  few  days  later  Commencement,  when  the  many  gradu- 
ates of  the  College  and  Professional  Schools  receive  their  diplomas  at 
the  hands  of  the  President. 

Class-Day  is  the  gala  day  of  the  Seniors,  and  thousands  of  guests 
gathered  from  various  parts  of  the  country  enjoy  its  varied  pro- 
gramme. The  Class-Day  oflficers  are  chosen  by  ballot  at  a  full 
meeting  of  the  class  held  in  the  October  previous.  The  Commence- 
ment-Day speakers  are  appointed  on  account  of  high  scholarship, 
the  merit  of  their  parts,  and  their  method  of  delivering  them. 

The  degree  of  Bachelor  of  Arts  is  given  in  four  grades,  the  degree 
without  distinction,  the  degree  cum  laude,  magna  cum  laude,  and 
summa  cum  laude.  Remarkable  excellence  in  any  department  secures 
the  graduate  Honors  or  Highest  Honors.  A  lower  grade  of  excel- 
lence is  rewarded  by  Honorable  Mention  in  the  favorite  subject.  All 
students  whose  records  at  the  close  of  the  Junior  year  indicate  that 
the}^  will  probably  receive  a  degree  with  distinction  are  entitled  to 
write  Commencement  Parts  in  competition  for  the  honor  of  being 
chosen  to  deliver  them.  By  winning  honors  in  any  department  a 
degree  with  distinction  is  secured,  but  the  more  common  ground  of  a 
degree  with  distinction  is  general  excellence  in  the  entire  work  of  the 
four  years. 


26 


THE    SCIENTIFIC    SCHOOL. 

The  Lawrence  Scientific  Scliool  is  situated  in  Cambridge  in  close 
proximity  to  the  College  Yard  and  dormitories,  Memorial  Hall,  the 
Observatory,  the  principal  laboratories  and  museums.  The  School 
presents  seven  thoroughly  equipped  departments  of  study,  in  any 
one  of  which  a  student  may  become  a  candidate  for  the  degree  of 
S.B.  These  departments  are  as  follows  :  Civil  and  Topographical 
Engineering,  Electrical  Engineering,  Chemistry,  Geology,  Biology, 
Anatomy,  Physiology  and  Physical  Culture,  and  a  course  in  General 
Science.  As  the  instruction  given  in  the  School  is  open  to  the 
students  of  the  College  —  hundreds  of  whom  are  allowed  to  make 
scieutific  work  the  basis  of  their  course  for  the  degree  of  Bachelor  of 
Arts  —  the  number  of  candidates  for  the  degree  of  Bachelor  of  Sci- 
ence affords  no  indication  of  the  number  of  students  actually  engaged 
in  scientific  study.  Instructors  of  various  grades  employed  by  the 
School  have  their  headquarters  in  the  laboratories  and  museums,  the 
Botanic  Garden,  the  Herbarium,  and  other  centres  of  scientific  work. 
The  admission  requirements  are  fewer  than  those  of  the  Cpllege 
and  consist  of  the  following  subjects :  history,  algebra,  plane 
geometry,  logarithms,  plane  trigonometry  with  its  applications  to 
surveying  and  navigation,  physical  science,  French  or  German, 
and  English.  If  the  candidate  is  to  enter  the  course  in  Civil  En- 
gineering, he  must  pass  admission  examinations  —  in  addition  to 
those  just  named  —  in  solid  geometry  or  the  elements  of  analytical 
geometry.  The  admission  examinations  are  held  at  the  same  times 
and  places  as  those  of  the  College.  The  School  admits  to  advanced 
standing,  without  examination,  on  proof  of  high  scholarship  else- 
where. The  School  has  in  its  gift  sixteen  scholarships  of  an  annual 
value  of  $150  each.  Eight  of  these  scholarships  are  assignable  to 
graduates  of  reputable  Normal  Schools  in  the  United  States.  The 
incumbents  are  appointed  in  the  first  instance  upon  the  recommenda- 
tion of  the  principals  of  the  schools  from  which  they  come.  Scientific 
School  students  have  the  same  rights  in  the  dining  clubs,  dormitories, 
gymnasium,  athletic  fields,  and  other  conveniences  of  the  University 
which  college  undergraduates  enjoy.  They  ma}^  take  courses  in  other 
departments  of  the  University  without  extra  charge.  Special  Students 
are  admitted  to  the  School  in  much  the  same  way  and  upon  the  same 
terras  that  Special  Students  are  admitted  to  the  College. 


27 


THE   GRADUATE    SCHOOL. 

A  graduate  of  any  college  or  scientific  school  of  good  standing  is 
admitted  to  the  Graduate  School  on  presentation  of  his  diploma  or 
some  equall}^  satisfactory  certificate  of  graduation.  Members  of  this 
department  are  not  necessarily  candidates  for  any  degree  ;  but  they 
may  become  candidates  for  the  degree  of  A.M.,  Ph.D.,  or  S.D.,  by 
permission  of  the  Administrative  Board  of  the  School.  Under  ceitain 
circumstances,  explained  below,  they  may  become  candidates  for  the 
degree  of  A.B.  They  may  pursue  an}'  of  the  courses  of  study  offered 
in  the  department  of  Arts  and  Sciences,  and  may  also  take  any  of  the 
studies  offered  in  the  Professional  Schools.  The  choice  of  studies  of 
each  student  must  be  approved  by  the  Administrative  Board  of  the 
School ;  but  any  reasonable  selection  of  studies  suitable  to  the  student's 
attainments  is  always  approved.  A  student  who  means  to  present  him- 
self for  a  degree,  or  one  who  holds  a  fellowship  or  scholarship,  is  ex- 
pected to  do  full  work ;  and  this  requirement  is  ordinarily  interpreted 
to  mean  that  he  must  take  in  each  3'ear  the  equivalent  of  four  courses 
of  study  of  advanced  grade.  Other  students  may  take  a  smaller 
number  of  courses,  and  devote  a  part  of  their  time  to  other  pursuits. 
If  a  student  in  the  Graduate  School,  who  is  not  a  graduate  of 
Harvard  College  or  of  the  Lawrence  Scientific  School,  wishes  to 
become  a  candidate  for  a  degree,  he  must  first  apply  to  the  Com- 
mittee of  the  Faculty  on  Admission  from  other  Colleges  for  a  state- 
ment of  the  conditions  under  which  he  can  receive  the  degree  for 
which  he  wishes  to  become  a  candidate. 

Persons  who  have  never  received  any  academic  degree  are  permit- 
ted to  register  in  the  Graduate  School,  if  in  the  judgment  01  the 
Administrative  Board  they  are  of  suitable  age  and  attainments.  If 
of  lower  standing  in  these  respects,  they  may  be  admitted  to  one  of 
the  undergraduate  classes  or  to  the  list  of  Special  Students  in  the 
College  or  the  Scientific  School.  Those  admitted  to  the  Graduate 
School  must  be  men  of  high  scholarship,  who  are  fully  competent  to 
engage  in  advanced  studies.  They  cannot  become  candidates  for  one 
of  the  higher  degrees  unless  they  show  that  they  have  fulfilled  all 
the  substantial  requirements  for  the  degree  of  A.B.  or  S.B. 

If  any  student  wishes  to  become  a  candidate  for  a  degree,  his  course 
of  study  must  be  approved  as  suitable  for  a  student  having  that  inten- 
tion. In  April  of  each  year  members  of  the  Graduate  School  are  called 
upon  to  state  definitely  whether  they  wish  to  be  candidates  for  a  degree 
in  the  following  June.  Persons  whose  previous  course  of  study  has 
been  accepted,  without   special  conditions,  as  qualifying  them  to  be 


28 

candidates  for  the  degree  of  A.M.,  are  admitted  to  that  degree  on 
passing  with  high  credit  in  four  advanced  courses  of  study,  or  their 
equivalent,  provided  they  have  been  in  continuous  residence  during 
at  least  one  academic  year.  The  degree  of  A.B.  is  often  conferred 
upon  members  of  the  Graduate  School  who  are  not  already  grad- 
uates of  Harvard  College,  and  whose  previous  training  does  not 
fit  them  to  become  candidates  for  the  degree  of  A.M.  in  their  first 
year  of  residence.  At  least  two  years  of  residence  are  required  of 
candidates  for  the  degree  of  Ph.D.  or  S.D.  The  only  variation 
from  this  rule  is  in  the  case  of  graduates  of  Harvard  College  or 
of  the  Scientific  School  who  study  in  part  outside  of  Cambridge 
under  guidance  of  members  of  the  Faculty.  For  them  one  of  the  two 
years  of  residence,  but  not  of  systematic  work,  is  sometimes  remitted 
on  the  ground  of  their  previous  residence.  Every  candidate  for  the 
degree  of  S.D.  (except  such  as  hold  the  two  degrees  of  A.B.  and 
S.B.  from  this  University)  is  compelled  to  devote  a  third  year  to 
study  or  research,  but  it  need  not  be  spent  in  Cambridge.  The 
degree  of  Ph.D.  or  S.D.  is  not  given  to  every  candidate  who  studies 
faithfully  the  required  number  of  years  or  in  fulfilment  of  a  deter- 
minate programme.  A  thesis  showing  original  treatment  of  an  ap- 
proved subject,  or  giving  evidence  of  independent  research,  and 
thorough  examinations  on  a  broad  and  connected  field  of  study,  are 
the  final  tests  of  the  candidate's  fitness  to  receive  one  of  these  sig- 
nificant and  valued  degrees.  If  by  these  tests  he  is  found  wanting, 
his  term  of  study  must  be  prolonged  or  his  hopes  of  attaining  the 
degree  relinquished.  Detailed  statements  regarding  the  requirements 
for  the  degrees  of  A.M.,  Ph.D.,  and  S.D.  are  to  be  found  in  the 
Graduate  School  pamphlet,  which  can  be  obtained  on  application  to 
the  Secretary. 

During  the  years  from  1880  to  1890,  students  from  78  different 
American  and  foreign  colleges  and  universities  were  admitted  to  the 
Graduate  School.  During  the  present  year  59  institutions  are  repre- 
sented in  the  School. 

The  aggregate  annual  value  of  the  fellowships  and  scholarships 
assignable  to  students  in  the  Graduate  School  is  $21,850.  Details 
regarding  these  aids  will  be  found  in  the  Graduate  School  pamphlet. 
They  must  be  applied  for  before  March  31.  Applications  from  per- 
sons not  already  members  of  the  University  should  be  accompanied 
by  testimonials  from  instructors,  original  publications,  and  any  sim- 
ilar material  which  will  supply  evidence  of  the  candidate's  fitness  for 
appointment.  No  preference  is  given  to  graduates  of  Harvard  Uni- 
versity except  in  a  few  cases  where  such  preference  is  required  by  the 
terms  of  the  foundation  of  the  fellowship  or  scholarship.     In  some 


29 

cases  the  preference  is  given  to  persons  not  graduates  of  Harvard 
University,  or  who  have  first  been  graduated  at  some  other  college. 

In  order  that  any  year  in  the  Graduate  School  may  be  counted  as 
a  year  of  residence,  registration  should  take  place  as  early  as  the  last 
Thursday  in  September,  at  the  opening  of  the  academic  year.  But 
students  are  admitted  to  the  Graduate  School  at  any  time  in  the 
year  ;  the  conditions  of  their  registration  being  fixed  in  each  case  by 
the  Administrative  Board. 

The  Graduate  School  has  recently  been  reorganized  under  the 
Faculty  of  Arts  and  Sciences  in  such  a  manner  as  to  bring  it  forward . 
as  an  important  department  from  the  point  of  view  of  liberal  learning, 
and  to  put  it  in  relations  of  mutual  support  with  the  College  and 
Scientific  School,  so  that  it  will  now  enjoy,  far  more  satisfactorily  than 
heretofore,  its  full  share  of  the  attention  of  the  instructors  and  of  the 
life  of  the  University.  The  opportunities  for  advanced  study  which 
it  offers  should  be  carefully  considered  by  persons  who  desire  to 
carry  their  scholarship  beyond  the  point  reached  by  the  college  grad- 
uate. Young  men  who  are  looking  to  careers  as  teachers,  journalists, 
writers,  economists,  and  legislators,  or  in  any  other  literary  or  purely 
scientific  profession,  ought,  if  possible,  to  devote  a  year  or  two  to 
systematic  study  in  such  higher  fields  of  learning  as  they  wish  to 
qualify  themselves  to  cultivate  in  the  best  manner.  It  is  no  longer 
true  that  a  mere  college  education  is  enough  in  this  country  to  pre- 
pare a  man  for  good,  intellectual  work  in  his  generation,  without 
some  higher  and  more  special  training.  The  Graduate  School  may 
be  regarded  as  the  professional  department  for  the  literary  and  purely 
scientific  professions  ;  and  the  growth  of  its  numbers  in  the  past  few 
years  indicates  that  it  is  beginning  to  take  its  proper  place,  from  that 
point  of  view,  in  the  general  estimation. 

All  the  privileges  of  students  in  the  University  are  open  to  a 
member  of  the  Graduate  School.  He  may,  under  suitable  and  lib- 
eral conditions,  enjoy  the  use  of  the  various  libraries,  laboratories, 
and  museums  of  the  University  ;  he  may  take  courses  in  any  of  its 
departments  without  extra  payment ;  he  may  attend  its  public  lec- 
tures and  readings ;  he  may  use  the  Gymnasium  and  Athletic 
Grounds ;  he  may  be  admitted  to  the  Dining  Hall,  the  Foxcroft 
Club,  etc.  ;  he  may  obtain  a  college  room  ;  he  may  be  elected  into 
the  students'  societies  and  the  departmental  clubs ;  he  may  gain 
access  to  valuable  libraries  and  collections  in  the  neighborhood  of 
the  University.  If  a  zealous  and  competent  student,  he  will  find 
every  provision  made  for  his  advancement  which  the  ample  resources 
of  the  University  permit. 


30 


THE   DIVINITY   SCHOOL. 

The  Harvard  Divinity  School  is  non-sectarian,  its  Constitution 
prescribing  that  "  every  encouragement  be  given  to  the  serious,  im- 
partial, and  unbiased  investigation  of  Christian  truth,  and  that  no 
assent  to  the  peculiarities  of  any  denomination  of  Christians  shall  be 
required  either  of  the  instructors  or  students."  The  Baptist,  Con- 
gregational and  Unitarian  denominations  are  represented  in  its 
Faculty.  It  admits  to  its  classes  as  candidates  for  the  degree  of 
D.B.  only  persons  who  have  received  the  degree  of  A.B.,  or  who 
satisfy  the  Faculty  that  their  education  has  been  equal  to  that  of 
graduates  of  the  best  New  England  colleges.  Persons  not  candi- 
dates for  the  degree  of  D.B.  may  be  admitted  as  special  students  on 
examination  in  Latin  and  Greek.  Students  can  be  admitted  to  ad- 
vanced standing  only  on  examination,  except  that  graduates  of  other 
theological  schools  who  have  received  the  degree  of  A.B.  and  who 
bring  evidence  of  high  standing,  may  be  admitted  to  the  Senior  class 
without  examination.  Graduates  of  other  theological  schools,  not 
candidates  for  the  degree  of  D.B.,  may  be  admitted  as  resident  grad- 
uates. Such  students  are  encouraged  to  do  independent  work  in  any 
department  of  theological  study  and  may  take  part  in  any  of  the 
exercises  of  the  School.  The  degree  of  D.B.  is  given  to  successful 
candidates  after  a  residence  of  three  years,  to  which  a  year  of  post- 
graduate study  may  be  added.  The  instruction  of  the  School  includes 
courses  in  Hebrew,  Jewish  and  Classical  Aramaic,  The  History  of 
Israel  both  Political  and  Religious,  New  Testament  Introduction, 
Criticism  and  Interpretation,  Church  History  and  the  History-  of  Doc- 
trine, The  Philosophy  of  Religion,  Systematic  Theology,  Comparative 
Religion,  The  Ethics  of  Social  Reform,  Homiletics,  Pastoral  Care, 
and  Elocution.  Its  studies  are  to  some  extent  elective,  about  fifty 
percent  more  hours  of  class-work  being  offered  than  are  required  for 
the  degree.  Students,  except  special  students,  may  take  courses  m 
other  departments  of  the  University  without  charge.  The  School  is 
amply  endowed  with  scholarships  and  other  beneficiary  funds,  the 
income  of  which  is  assigned  to  graduate  and  other  students  without 
regard  to  denominational  differences.  A  certain  grade  of  scholarship 
must,  however,  be  reached  in  order  that  such  help  may  be  received. 
Its  students  have  included  since  1885  graduates  of  the  following  56 
colleges  and  22  schools  of  theology.  Those  marked  with  an  asterisk 
are  represented  in  the  School  the  current  year,  1891-92. 


31 


Colleges. 

Alleghany, 

Iowa, 

Trinity  (Conn.), 

Amherst, 

Johns  Hopkins, 

♦Trinity  (N.  C), 

*Antioch, 

*Knox, 

Tufts, 

Bates, 

Lebanon  Valley, 

University  of  Chicago, 

*Boston  University, 

London  University, 

"           "  Georgia, 

*Bowcloin, 

McGill, 

"            "  ♦Indiana, 

Brown, 

♦Maine  State, 

"            "  Kansas, 

Canton, 

Mt.  Allison, 

"           "  ♦Michigan, 

*City  of  New  York, 

Mt.  Union, 

"           "  ♦Nebraska, 

*Colby, 

♦Oberlin, 

"            "  N.  Carolina, 

Columbia, 

♦Ohio  State, 

"           "  Vermont, 

*Dalhousie, 

Olivet, 

"           "Washington, 

*Doshisha  (Japan), 

Ottawa, 

"           "  ♦Wiscon!^in, 

Denver, 

Owens, 

Washington  University 

De  Pauw, 

Pennsylvania, 

(Missouri), 

♦Harvard, 

♦Princeton, 

Western, 

*Haverforcl, 

Eacine, 

Williams, 

Hillsdale, 

♦St.  Francis  Xavier, 

Wooster, 

Illinois  Wesleyan, 

St.  Stephen's, 

Yale, 

Theological  Seminaries. 

Andover, 

♦Halifax, 

Princeton, 

*Bangor, 

Hillsdale, 

South  Baptist, 

Boston, 

♦Meadville, 

Tufts, 

♦Cambridge  Episcopal, 

'    Methodist  College, 

Union, 

Canton, 

Belfast  (Ireland), 

Western, 

♦Chicago  Baptist, 

Newton, 

♦Yale. 

♦Doshisha  (Japan), 

♦Oberlin, 

• 

♦General  Theo.  Seminary,  ♦Pacific  Theo.  Seminary, 


For  several  years  the  number  of  resident  graduate  students  in  the 
School  has  been  increasing.  The  wide  range  of  studies  offered  by 
the  School,  the  privilege  of  attending  courses  in  other  departments  of 
the  University  without  extra  charge,  the  opportunities  to  secure  ample 
pecuniary  aid,  and  the  fact  that  men  of  all  creeds  meet  in  this  School 
on  equal  terms,  animated  by  a  single  purpose,  are  causes  which  effec- 
tively combine  to  stimulate  this  increase.  The  tuition  fee  charged  in 
the  School  is  $50,  or  only  one  third  of  the  fee  charged  under  the 
Faculty  of  Arts  and  Sciences.  The  two  Williams  Fellowships  of 
$500  each,  open  to  resident  graduate  students  in  the  School,  are  among 
the  most  effective  aids  to  advanced  theological  work  in  this  country. 
They  may  be  held  by  distinguished  graduates  of  any  school  of  Theol- 
ogy who  intend  to  enter  the  Christian  ministry. 


32 


THE   LAW    SCHOOL. 

The  course  for  the  degree  of  Bachelor  of  Laws  is  three  years  in 
length.  Instruction  is  given  in  the  following  subjects  :  Torts,  Crim- 
inal Law,  Contracts,  Real  Property,  Common  Law  Pleading,  Equity 
Pleading  and  Jurisdiction,  Bills  and  Notes,  Evidence,  Sales,  Trusts, 
Agency,  Carriers,  Partnership,  Corporations,  Suretyship  and  Mort- 
gage, Patent  Law,  Constitutional  Law,  Massachusetts  Law  and 
Practice.  The  method  of  instruction  applied  in  the  School  is  singu- 
larly effective.  Principles  are  learned  not  by  memorizing  the  pages 
of  text-books,  but  by  analyzing  leading  English  and  American 
cases  which  include  in  their  decisions  and  dicta  the  living  body  of 
the  law.  A  student  of  abilitj-  who  spends  three  years  of  intelli- 
gent effort  in  the  School  is  equipped,  except  in  one  particular, 
for  active  professional  labor  in  any  part  of  the  Union.  The  ex- 
ception is  the  practice  and  statute  law  of  his  own  State,  but  his 
familiarity  with  the  fundamental  principles  of  law  makes  the  task  of 
mastering  local  practice  comparatively  easy.  Honor  graduates  of 
the  School  are  certain  to  receive  invitations  to  enter  leading  Law 
offices  in  various  parts  of  the  country.  During  the  ten  years  from 
1880  to  1890,  475  graduates  of  Harvard  and  249  graduates  of  other 
colleges  attended  the  School.  To  gain  admission  to  candidacy  for 
the  degree  of  LL.B.  a  student  is  required,  on  entering,  either  to  show 
that  he  is  a  graduate  of  a  college  or  scientific  school  of  good  standing, 
or  to  pass  creditable  examinations  in  Blackstone's  Commentaries  and 
in  either  Latin,  French,  or  German.  Special  students  are  required 
to  meet  the  same  tests.  A  limited  number  of  scholarships  are 
assigned  each  year  to  needy  students  of  at  least  one  year's  standing 
whose  rank  seems  to  justify  giving  them  assistance. 

The  most  promising  students  of  each  class  are  elected  members  of 
the  Law  Clubs,  several  of  which  have  been  in  existence  in  the  School 
for  many  years,  and  include  in  their  lists  of  former  members  jurists 
of  national  and  local  reputation.  These  clubs  are  most  useful  aux- 
iliaries to  regular  work,  requiring  their  members  to  prepare  and 
argue  each  week  cases  illustrating  the  most  difficult  problems  under 
discussion  in  the  lecture-rooms.  The  members  of  the  Faculty  and 
other  instructors,  nine  in  number,  reside  near  the  School  and  almost 
without  exception  devote  their  entire  time  to  the  work  of  the  School 
and  the  personal  needs  of  the  students.     The  regular  course  of  study 


33 


for  the  degree  of  LL.B.  calls  for  ten  hours  a  week  in  the  lecture- 
rooms  during  the  first  year,  ten  during  the  second,  and  eight  during 
the  third.  For  the  Honor  degree  ten  hours  are  required  in  the  third 
year.  The  average  student  of  merit  works  seven  or  eight  hours  a 
day  in  the  School  including  his  lecture  hours.  Examinations  are  held 
in  June  on  the  work  of  the  year.  Only  students  of  great  promise  are 
admitted  to  the  Honor  degree. 

At  least  two  full  years  of  residence  are  required  of  every  candidate 
for  the  degree.  Sometimes  students  pass  advanced-standing  exami- 
nations and  enter  at  the  beginning  of  the  second  year.  Sometimes 
they  omit  residence  in  the  second  year  —  taking  the  examinations, 
however,  at  the  usual  time  —  and  sometimes  they  leave  the  School  at 
the  end  of  the  second  year  and  return  to  take  the  third-year  examina- 
tions at  the  end  of  that  jesii\  Graduates  of  Harvard  or  of  other 
colleges  who  have  had  their  degrees  approved  by  the  Faculty  of  Arts 
and  Sciences,  and  who  are  not  candidates  for  the  degree  of  LL.B., 
may  obtain  the  degree  of  Master  of  Arts  after  one  year's  satisfactory 
study  in  the  School,  or  may  take  a  part  of  their  work  in  the  School 
and  the  remainder  in  the  Graduate  School. 

Up  to  July,  1891,  2376  persons  had  been  graduated  from  the  Law 
School.  Austin  Hall,  first  occupied  by  the  School  in  1883,  is  archi- 
tecturally one  of  the  most  satisfactory  buildings  in  Cambridge. 

The  following  table  exhibits  the  attendance  at  the  School  during 
the  last  twentj'-one  years  :  — 


Year. 

Whole  no.  of  stu- 
dents. 

No.  present  during 
the  whole  j^ear. 

No.  present  only 
part  of  the  year. 

Averag-e  num- 
ber. 

1870-71 

165 

107 

58 

136 

1871-72 

138 

107 

31 

123 

1872-73 

117 

109 

8 

113 

1873-74 

141 

121 

20 

131 

1874-75 

144 

130 

14 

137 

1875-76 

173 

153 

20 

163 

1876-77 

199 

168 

31 

184 

1877-78 

196 

172 

24 

183 

1878-79 

169 

137 

32 

154 

1879-80 

177 

138 

39 

157 

1880-81 

161 

136 

25 

149 

1881-82 

161 

139 

22 

146 

1882-83 

138 

120 

18 

129 

1883-84 

150 

130 

20 

140 

1884-85 

156 

139 

17 

148 

1885-86 

158 

142 

16 

151 

1886-87 

188 

160 

28 

174 

1887-88 

225 

197 

28 

211 

1888-89 

225 

198 

27 

212 

1889-90 

262 

229 

33 

245 

1890-91 

285 

255 

30 

272 

34 


THE   MEDICAL    SCHOOL. 

The  Harvard  Medical  School  is  situated  on  Boylston  Street,  Boston, 
ia  a  building  completed  in  1883  at  a  total  cost,  including  land,  of 
$321,415.62.  The  Sears  Laboratories  of  Pathology  and  Bacteriology, 
completed  in  1890  at  a  cost  of  $35,000,  are  connected  with  the  School 
building.  The  Medical  department  is  the  largest  of  the  professional 
schools  of  the  University  and  one  of  the  oldest,  having  given  degrees 
since  1788.  In  all  it  has  graduated  3180  persons.  At  present  it 
gives  the  degree  of  M.D.  after  either  three  or  four  years  of  successful 
study  and  examination.  After  the  beghiniug  of  the  academic  year 
1892-93,  the  required  course  of  stud}^  will  be  a  graded  course  covering 
four  years.  Graduates  of  colleges,  scientific  schools,  or  medical 
schools  are  admitted  to  the  School  without  examination.  Non-gradu- 
ates are  required  to  pass  in  the  following  subjects  :  English,  Latin, 
physics,  and  also  in  either  French,  German,  algebra,  plane  geometry, 
or  botany. 

The  standard  of  the  School  is  high,  its  examinations  are  severe, 
and  its  facilities  of  all  kinds  great.  The  Boston  hospitals,  noted 
for  their  model  administration,  are  in  close  sympathy  with  the 
School,  and  draw  upon  its  best  graduates  for  services  of  a  mutually 
advantageous  kind.  The  School  employs  22  professors  and  assistant 
professors  and  48  other  instructors  and  lecturers,  many  of  whom 
are  specialists  of  reputation.  The  School  has  a  moderate  number 
of  scholarships  and  other  pecuniary  aids  in  its  gift  which  are  given 
only  upon  clear  proof  of  merit.  In  addition  to  its  regular  instruc- 
tion leading  to  the  degree  of  M.D.,  the  School  offers  graduate 
instruction  of  a  grade  heretofore  usually  sought  for  only  in  British 
or  Continental  schools.  This  instruction  is  wholly  distinct  from  the 
undergraduate  instruction  in  the  School  and  is  arranged  in  courses 
lasting  about  eight  weeks  each  and  designed  to  accommodate  practi- 
tioners whose  residence  is  necessaril}^  brief.  Certificates  of  attendance 
are  issued  to  those  who  have  taken  these  courses.  The  School  ofl[ers 
summer  instruction  of  a  nature  particularly  suited  for  graduates  whose 
opportunities  for  study  have  not  been  great,  or  who  have  had  no 
chances  to  profit  by  hospital  practice.  The  summer  courses  are 
clinical  in  character  and  are  given  in  hospitals  and  dispensaries  by 
the  surgeons  on  duty  in  them,  and  in  the  School  laboratories  by  the 
officers  in  charge.  Details  regarding  any  of  the  instruction  offered 
by  the  School  may  be  obtained  from  the  Dean  or  the  Secretary  of  the 
Medical  School,  Boylston  Street,  Boston. 


35 


THE   DENTAL    SCHOOL. 

Being  closely  connected  with  the  Medical  School  and  dependent 
upon  hospital  and  infirmary  work  to  be  secured  only  in  the  midst 
of  a  large  city,  the  Dental  School  is  situated  in  Boston.  It  occu- 
pies the  building  on  North  Grove  Street  for  many  years  used  by 
the  Medical  School.  To  enter  the  School  a  candidate  who  has 
not  passed  an  examination  for  admission  to  the  College  or  the 
Scientific  School  of  the  Universitj^,  or  who  has  not  already  taken  a 
degree  in  arts,  letters,  science,  or  medicine,  must  pass  an  examination 
in  English,  physics,  and  either  Latin,  French,  German,  algebra,  or 
plane  geometry.  _  Admission  to  advanced  standing  is  granted  upon 
satisfactory  grounds. 

The  course  for  the  degree  of  the  Doctor  of  Dental  Medicine  is  a 
graded  one,  covering  three  continuous  years.  The  first  is  identical 
with  that  in  the  Medical  School.  Instruction  is  given  in  anatomy, 
physiology,  general  chemistry,  dental  pathology,  oral  anatomy  and 
physiology,  neurology,  dental  chemistry,  dental  materia  medica 
and  therapeutics,  surgery  and  surgical  pathology,  and  operative  and 
mechanical  dentistry.  Thirty  persons  take  part  in  the  instruction  of 
the  School,  which  is  thorough  and  exhaustive.  No  one  can  secure 
the  degree  who  has  not  studied  medicine  or  dentistry  three  full  years 
and  passed  the  required  examinations  of  the  School.  The  Infirmary 
and  laborator}'  practice  afforded  by  the  School  is  invaluable.  The 
Infirmary  remains  open  during  the  summer  and  one  of  the  clinical 
instructors  and  a  demonstrator  are  in  attendance  daily.  Students 
have  access  to  the  Boston  hospitals,  and  to  the  dissecting-rooms  and 
museum  of  the  Medical  School. 

The  diploma  of  the  School  is  accepted  by  the  English  Board  of 
Eegistration  under  the  Dental  Act,  so  that  graduates  of  the  School 
who  are  not  British  subjects  can  practice  dentistry  in  Great  Britain 
without  further  examination.  Board  and  lodging  are  obtainable  in 
Boston  at  from  five  dollars  a  week  upwards. 

The  School  granted  its  first  degree  in  1869,  and  since  that  time  has 
graduated  over  two  hundred  persons.  Its  graduates  are  practising  in 
a  majority  of  the  northern  and  western  States,  in  Canada,  in  most  of 
the  principal  countries  of  Europe,  in  Australia,  Japan,  the  West  In- 
dies, and  South  America. 


36 


THE   SCHOOL   OF  VETERINARY   MEDICINE. 

The  School  of.  Veterinary  Medicine  was  founded  in  1882.  It  has 
already  rendered  a  service  to  the  country  in  being  among  the  first  to 
introduce  a  graded  course  of  study  of  the  kind  long  in  force  in  the 
best  European  schools.  This  change  may  be  said  to  have  put  the 
modern  science  of  veterinary  medicine  upon  a  secure  foundation  in 
America. 

Entrance  to  its  classes  is  guarded  by  admission  examinations  in 
English,  arithmetic,  and  in  either  French,  German,  Latin,  algebra, 
plane  geometry,  or  zoology. 

Its  course  extends  over  three  years  of  about  nine  months  each,  and 
is  in  detail  as  follows  :  — 

For  the  first  year :  Anatomy,  physiology,  general  chemistry,  and 
botany. 

For  the  second  year  :  Advanced  anatomy,  practical  anatomy,  medi- 
cal chemistry,  materia  medica,  therapeutics,  pathological  anatomy, 
surgical  pathology,  theory  and  practice  of  veterinary  medicine,  clini- 
cal medicine,  and  clinical  surgery. 

For  the  third  year  :  Warranty  and  evidence,  veterinary  therapeutics, 
obstetrics,  theory  and  practice  of  veterinary  medicine,  cattle  practice, 
operative  veterinary  surgery,  ophthalmolog}^  parasites  and  parasitic 
diseases,  clinical  medicine,  and  clinical  surgery. 

The  instructors  in  the  School  number  22  persons  ;  and  where  the  sub- 
jects are  common  to  all  branches  of  medicine,  the  instructors  in  them 
are  drawn  from  among  the  members  of  the  Medical  Faculty  of  the 
University.  The  School  has  no  scholarships.  In  order  to  be  in  the 
centre  of  a  large  and  busy  community,  the  School  and  its  Hospital 
are  situated  in  Boston,  where,  in  buildings  erected  particularly  for  its 
uses,  all  purely  veterinary  instruction  is  given.  The  School  building 
contains  a  lecture-room  seating  one  hundred  persons  ;  a  reading- 
room  ;  a  dissecting-room  ;  and  a  museum.  Adjoining  is  a  Hospital 
building  with  accommodations  for  thirty-eight  horses  and  a  large 
number  of  dogs  ;  this  space  is  divided  into  three  wards.  The  build- 
ing includes  also  a  large  operating-room,  a  pharmacy,  and  a  forge 
where  horses  are  shod. 

The  department,  although  still  comparatively  small  in  numbers,  is 
effectively  constituted  and  offers  opportunities  for  the  study  of  both 
the  theory  and  practice  of  veterinai-y  medicine  which,  it  is  believed, 
are  as  yet  unapproached  in  the  United  States.  It  has  thus  far  grad- 
uated thirty-three  Doctors  of  Veterinary  Medicine,  and  it  now  has 
registered  over  thirt}'  students. 


37 


THE    BUSSEY   INSTITUTION. 

The  School  of  Agriculture  and  Horticulture  is  situated  about  five 
miles  from  the  heart  of  the  city  on  a  farm  of  200  acres  in  Jamaica 
Plain,  a  rural  portion  of  the  extended  municipalitj'  of  Boston.  In- 
struction is  given  in  agriculture,  useful  and  ornamental  gardening  and 
stock-raising,  and  in  Botany  and  Chemistry  as  applied  to  those  arts. 
The  students  of  the  School  include  persons  intending  to  become  farm- 
ers, gardeners,  florists,  landscape  gardeners,  managers  or  stewards  of 
large  estates,  stock  raisers,  overseers  of  farms,  or  owners  of  rural 
property. 

The  admission  requirements  are  nominal  as  regards  students  who 
■do  not  purpose  to  become  candidates  for  a  degree.  If  the  degree  of 
Bachelor  of  Science  is  desired,  the  candidate  must  have  spent  one 
year  at  the  Lawrence  Scientific  School  or  give  evidence  of  having 
taken  its  equivalent  elsewhere.  He  must  then  study  one  year  at  the 
Bussey  Institution  and  later  pursue  at  least  one  year  of  advanced 
study  there  or  in  other  departments  of  the  University  and  pass  exami- 
nations to  determine  the  excellence  of  his  work.  Instruction  is  given 
by  lectures  and  recitations,  and  by  practical  exercises  in  tlie  labora- 
tories, greenhouses,  and  fields  ;  every  student  being  taught  to  make 
experiments,  study  specimens,  and  observe  for  himself.  The  aim  of 
the  teacher  is  to  give  the  student  a  just  idea  of  the  principles  upon 
which  the  arts  of  agriculture  and  horticulture  depend  ;  to  teach  him 
how  to  make  intelligent  use  of  the  scientific  literature  which  relates  to 
these  arts  ;  and  to  enable  him  to  put  a  proper  estimate  upon  those 
kinds  of  evidence  which  are  obtained  by  experiments  and  by  the  ob- 
servation of  natural  objects.  The  tuition-fee  of  $150  is  remitted  in 
favor  of  students  of  limited  means.  Intelligent  students  in  need  of 
aid  are  permitted  to  work  for  their  board  and  lodging.  Those  who 
pay  the  full  fee  may  take  courses  in  other  departments  of  the  Uni- 
vsrsity  free  of  charge  and  enjoy  the  ]ibi*ary  and  other  privileges  open 
to  students  in  the  Cambridge  departments.  The  small  number  of 
students  at  this  School  assures  to  all  the  most  careful  personal  atten- 
tion. 

The  School  building  and  grounds  are  situated  upon  high  land 
commanding  views  of  an  attractive  country.  The  groves  and  park- 
like plantations  of  the  Arnold  Arboretum  adjoin  and  partly  surround 
the  land  used  by  the  Scliool.  Although  so  retired,  the  School  is  with- 
in easy  reach  of  Boston  with  its  libraries,  museums,  and  galleries  ; 
and  of  Cambridge  with  its  wealth  of  scientific  apparatus. 


38 


THE   SUMMER   SCHOOLS. 

A  week  or  more  after  Commencement  and  the  departure  of  the 
great  bod}'  of  students,  a  number  of  short  courses  or  schools  are 
opened  in  the  College  buildings  in  Cambridge  under  the  charge  of 
instructors  in  the  departments  of  Chemistry,  Phj^sics,  Botany,  Geol- 
ogy, Bodily  Training,  etc.  These  courses  are  largely  attended  by 
teachers  in  colleges  and  secondary  schools  ;  college  students  who  are 
sufficiently  in  earnest  in  their  studies  to  give  half  of  their  vacation 
to  work,  and  other  persons  —  women  as  well  as  men  —  who  wish  to 
avail  themselves  of  the  opportunity  to  use  Harvard's  wealth  of  appa- 
ratus in  the  weeks  when  it  would  otherwise  be  idle.  The  schools  are 
gaining  in  numbers  from  year  to  year.  The  fees  are  small  and  the 
opportunities  for  individual  progress  under  competent  guidance  are 
excellent.  Detailed  circulars  about  these  schools  are  published  early 
everj^  spring  and  may  be  obtained  from  the  Secretary.  Each  course 
lasts  about  six  weeks,  and  occupies  the  whole  time  of  its  students 
during  that  period.  The  number  of  students  in  the  summer  schools 
of  1891  was  363. 

During  the  summer  of  1892  the  following  courses  will  be  given  :  — 

Chemistry,  four  courses,  viz.  :  Fundamental  principles  of  chemistry  ; 
qualitative  analysis  ;  quantitative  analysis  ;  organic  chemistry. 

Botan}',  two  courses,  viz.  :  Vegetable  morphology  and  physiology 
and  microscopical  anatomy  of  phaenogams  ;  cryptogamic  botany. 

Physics,  two  courses. 

Geolog}',  three  courses. 

Engineering,  three  courses,  viz.  :  Topographical  surveying  ;  railway 
surveying  ;  electrical  engineering. 

Physical  Culture,  two  courses. 

Physiology  and  Hygiene. 

American  History. 

Socialism  and  Social  Problems. 

Trigonometry. 

Horticulture. 

English. 

German,  two  courses. 

French,  two  courses. 

History  and  Art  of  Teaching. 

Courses  at  the  Medical  School. 


39 


THE  ASTKONOMICAL  OBSERVATORY. 

The  Observatory  is  situated  upon  a  small  hill  about  half  a  mile 
northwest  of  the  principal  University  buildings.  Its  grounds  embrace 
7J  acres  and  contain  nine  buildings  belonging  to  this  depart- 
ment. The  main  building  includes  the  residence  of  the  Director,  the 
library,  various  computing  rooms,  the  15-inch  and  6-inch  equatorials 
and  8-inch  transit  circle.  One  of  the  smaller  buildings  contains  a 
photographic  laboratory  ;  the  others  contain  apparatus,  including  pho- 
tographic telescopes  of  the  respective  apertures  12,  11,  and  8  inches, 
and  a  reflector  28  inches  in  aperture.  Nearly  all  of  these  instruments 
are  in  constant  use,  two  of  the  photographic  telescopes  being  used 
throughout  the  whole  of  every  clear  night. 

In  addition  to  observations  conducted  in  Cambridge,  the  Observa- 
tory has  recently  been  maintaining  a  series  of  observations  in  South- 
ern California  and  in  Peru.  Additional  work  in  Peru  is  being  carried 
on  by  a  new  expedition.  The  work  undertaken  in  Peru  is  designed 
to  complete  investigations  begun  at  Cambridge  by  extending  them  ta 
the  parts  of  the  sky  invisible  at  northern  stations.  It  includes  pho- 
tometric measurements  of  the  light  of  the  stars,  photographic  charts 
of  their  places,  and  photographs  of  their  spectra. 

The  reduction  of  the  results  of  the  observations  in  Cambridge, 
California,  and  Peru  employs  a  force  of  about  forty  persons  at  the 
Cambridge  buildings,  and  it  is  in  computation  and  work  upon  photo- 
graphic plates  as  well  as  in  certain  kinds  of  observing  that  approved 
students  are  sometimes  employed  under  Professor  Pickering's  direc- 
tion. Competent  students  needing  pecuniary  aid  are  given  allowances 
varying  from  $200  to  $500  a  year  for  their  services,  but  the  work  for 
which  they  are  paid  affords  a  low  order  of  scientific  training  and 
leaves  little  time  for  other  study. 

The  instruction  in  astronomy  offered  by  the  University  is  not  given 
at  the  Observatory,  but  facilities  are  freely  offered  astronomers  for 
making  use  of  the  Observatorj'  library,  buildings,  grounds,  and  in- 
struments so  far  as  it  can  be  done  without  interfering  with  regular 
work.  Similar  opportunities  are  sometimes  offered  to  special  students 
in  astronomy,  but  the  constant  employment  of  the  instruments  greatly 
limits  such  use.  Persons  wishing  to  study  astronomy  in  Cambridge, 
or  to  obtain  employment  at  the  Observatory  in  connection  with  their 
studies  under  the  Faculty  of  Arts  and  Sciences,  are  advised  to  cor- 
respond with  the  Secretary  several  months  before  the  opening  of  the 
academic  year. 


40 


THE   UNIVEESITY   LIBRARY. 

The  University  Library  contains  about  400,000  bound  volumes  and 
over  300,000  unbound  maps  and  pamphlets.  It  is  the  largest 
of  the  university  libraries  of  the  country.  Its  increase  is  rapid. 
In  1879  it  gained  10,389  volumes  ;  in  1885,  14,558  ;  in  1888,  16,468. 
It  is  not  all  grouped  in  Gore  Hall,  its  main  building;  volumes 
relating  to  professional  work  being  placed  in  the  Professional 
School  buildings,  while  many  in  immediate  demand  in  the  classical 
department,  the  philosophical  department,  the  historical  department, 
and  similar  centres  of  activity  are  placed  within  eas}^  reach  of  the 
class-rooms  of  those  departments.  The  Library  is  conducted  upon 
the  most  modern  and  approved  methods,  and  its  primary  aim  is  to 
meet  all  immediate  demands  in  the  shortest  possible  time.  It  is 
catalogued  by  cards  —  first  by  authors,  second  by  subjects.  Delivery, 
considering  the  size  of  the  collection  and  its  steady  and  rapid  growth, 
is  singularly  prompt.  The  possession  of  ample  funds  for  the  pur- 
chase of  new  books  as  fast  as  needed  for  effective  instruction  is  one 
of  the  strongest  features  of  the  Library.  Its  total  annual  expendi- 
tures closely  approach  $50,000.  The  efficiency  of  the  Library  man- 
agement is  shown  by  the  number  of  those  who  use  it  and  by  the 
number  of  volumes  lent.  In  1888-89  over  80,000  volumes  were  lent 
to  individuals.  Of  the  Seniors  in  College  in  the  same  year,  97% 
used  the  Library  as  borrowers;  of  Juniors,  99%  ;  and  other  classes 
to  a  less  degree.  Fifteen  years  ago  only  57%  of  students  in  College 
used  the  Library  as  borrowers.  The  elective  system  deserves  a  part 
of  the  credit  for  this  increased  use  of  original  authorities.  The  mere 
note-taking  or  text-book  studying  student  is  now  the  exception  where 
he  used  to  be  the  rule. 

The  following  table  shows  the  distribution  of  bound  volumes  in  the 
several  libraries  :  — 

Gore  Hall 296,000 

Laboratory,  class-room,  and  office  libraries      ....  8,000 

Lawrence  Scientific  School 3,000 

Divinity  School 24,000 

Law  School 27,000 

Medical  School 2,000 

Bussey  Institution 3,000 

Observatory 7,000 

Botanic  Garden  .   • 6,000 

Museum  of  Comparative  Zoology 23,000 

Peabody  Museum 1,000 

400,000 


41 


THE   LABORATORIES. 

The  principal  laboratories  in  Cambridge  are  the  Boylston  Chemical 
Laboratory,  built  in  1857  and  enlarged  in  1870  ;  the  Jefferson  Phys- 
ical Laboratory,  completed  in  1884  at  a  cost  of  $115,000;  and  the 
laboratories  in  the  University  Museum  building,  which  include  ample 
and  separate  accommodations  for  the  departments  of  Zoology,  Paleon- 
tology, Geolog}^  Geography,  Petrography,  Mineralogy,  and  Botany. 
The  portion  of  the  Museum  building  occupied  by  the  laboratories  and 
lecture-rooms  of  these  departments  has  a  floor  space  of  over  an  acre.^ 
The  Peabody  Museum  contains  a  laboratory  for  anthropological  and 
archaeological  research.  Boylston  Hall  now  contains  six  large  chem- 
ical laboratories  and  a  number  of  private  rooms  for  instructors.  The 
largest  working-room  has  places  for  100  students.  It  is  especially 
devoted  to  qualitative  and  descriptive  work.  That  next  in  size  has- 
64  places.  In  all  250  working  tables  are  provided,  of  which  one  half 
are  occupied  b}"  two  students  each,  having  separate  lockers,  and 
working  at  different  hours.  The  new  Boylston  lecture-room  has 
seats  for  500  persons.  The  Jefferson  Physical  Laboratory  is  four 
stories  high  and  210  feet  long.  It  has  the  most  ample  accommoda- 
tions for  both  large  and  small  classes,  and  for  individual  work, 
free  from  interruption.  In  the  basement  and  first  story  stone  tables 
resting  upon  separate  columns  of  masonry  furnish  firm  support  for 
instruments  in  use.  In  the  western  end  of  the  building  a  large  rec- 
tangular tower  stands  on  an  independent  foundation  and  has  no 
contact  with  surrounding  rooms.  In  it  are  conducted  experiments 
requiring  extraordinary  stability  or  a  great  height  —  as  for  example, 
in  Foucault's  pendulum  experiment.  By  a  simple  device  nearly 
the  entire  length  of  the  building  may  be  used  in  experiments  for 
testing  the  velocity  of  light.  In  the  wing  where  magnetic  experi- 
ments are  tried  there  is  no  iron  in  the  wood-work  or  masonry  of  the 
building.  New  apparatus  is  procured  and  the  general  running  ex- 
penses of  this  Laboratory  are  in  large  part  paid  from  a  permanent 
income  derived  from  invested  funds. 

The  new  laborator}^  of  the  department  of  Psychology  occupies 
rooms  in  Dane  Hall. 

The  laboratories  of  the  Medical,  Dental,  and  Veterinary  Schools, 
and  the  School  of  Agriculture  and  Horticulture,  are  of  a  size  equal 
to  the  needs  of  those  departments.  The  year  1889-90  saw  the  com- 
pletion, at  a  cost  of  $35,000,  of  the  Sears  Laboratories  for  pathology 
and  bacteriology.  They  form  an  important  portion  of  the  equipment 
of  the  Medical  School. 


42 


THE   MUSEUMS. 

The  magnitude  of  the  museums  of  the  University  is  illustrated  by 
"the  fact  that  the  Universit}^  Museum  alone  contains  four  acres  of 
floor  space.  It  includes  the  Museum  of  Comparative  Zoology,  Natural 
History  Laboratories  of  Zoology,  Paleontology,  Geology,  and  Geog- 
raphy, and  the  Museums  of  Mineralogy  and  Botany.  The  portion 
of  the  building  devoted  to  Comparative  Zoology  and  the  laboratories 
named  cost  $450,000.  The  section  occupied  by  the  Botanical  Museum 
cost  $75,000  and  that  occupied  by  the  Mineralogical  Museum  $50,000. 

The  original  scheme  for  this  Museum  was  proposed  by  Professor 
Louis  Agassiz  in  1859.  Its  realization  is  in  great  part  the  work  of 
bis  son  Alexander  Agassiz,  the  present  Curator  of  the  Museum. 

In  an  adjoining  building,  having  a  floor  area  of  29,828  square  feet 
(not  including  basement  and  attic) ,  are  the  Peabody  Museum  of 
American  Archaeology  and  Ethnology  and  the  Semitic  Museum. 
The  latter  will  in  time  be  removed  to  other  quarters.  Tlie  Fine  Arts 
collections  are  in  part  in  the  rooms  of  the  department  of  Fine  Arts 
in  Sever  Hall  and  in  part  in  the  Museum  of  Fine  Arts,  Copley  Sq., 
Boston.  The  collection  of  coins  and  medals  belonging  to  tlie  Uni- 
versity is  kept  in  Gore  Hall.  The  Anatomical  Museum  is  placed  in 
the  Medical  School  building  on  Boylston  St.,  Boston.  The  Museum 
of  the  Dental  School  is  in  the  School  building  on  North  Grove  St., 
and  that  of  the  School  of  Veterinary  Medicine  is  in  the  Veterinary 
Hospital  building  on  Village  St.,  Boston.  The  Arboretum  Museum 
is  to  be  placed  in  the  new  Hunnewell  building.  The  actual  cost  of 
the  collections  in  the  Museum  of  Comparative  Zoology  has  been  over 
$350,000.  The  collections  are  in  part  open  to  the  public.  The  first 
of  the  exhibition-rooms  open  to  the  public  is  the  Synoptic  Room,  in 
which  the  entire  animal  kingdom  is  summarized  in  a  compact  collec- 
tion of  distinctive  types.  Beyond  this  are  the  systematic  collections 
of  Mammals,  Birds,  Reptiles,  Fishes,  Mollusks,  Crustacea  and  In- 
sects, Radiates,  Sponges,  and  Protozoa.  Finally,  there  are  the  rooms 
devoted  to  faunal  areas,  including  those  of  North  and  South  America, 
Europe,  the  Inclo-Asiatic,  the  African,  the  Australian,  and  the  At- 
lantic* The  larger  parts  of  the  collection  are  not  open  to  the  public, 
but  are  in  constant  use  by  officers  or  competent  students  of  the 
University  engaged  in  research. 

The  collections  in  the  Botanical  Museum  are  not  fully  arranged 
and  are  open  to  the  public  only  in  part.  When  completed,  the  collec- 
tions will  be  found  to  be  economic  in  theory,  containing,  for  example, 


43 

woods,  fruits,  fibres,  etc.,  as  well  as  a  unique  and  beautiful  series  of 
glass  models  of  flowers. 

The  Mineralogical  Collections  are  in  part  open  to  the  public.  The 
public  portions  —  about  one  half  in  amount  —  are  large  enough  fully 
to  illustrate  the  extent,  beauty,  and  variety  of  the  mineral  kingdom. 
Some  portions  are  S3'stematic  in  arrangement ;  others  are  grouped  to 
illustrate  striking  characteristics  of  minerals — lustre,  for  example. 
The  collection  of  meteorites  is  one  of  the  finest  in  existence.  The 
portion  of  the  collections  not  open  to  the  public  consist  of  systematic 
series  grouped  for  specific  and  comparative  study,  and  duplicates  and 
olass-room»material  continually  being  used  and  replaced.  The  value 
of  this  collection  is  great.  The  meteorites  alone  represent  $30,000  ; 
the  whole  collection,  from  $100,000  to  $150,000. 

The  Peabody  Museum  is  open  to  the  public.  It  contains  large 
archaeological  and  ethnological  collections  obtained  by  systematic 
and  thorough  explorations  of  burial-places,  caves,  shell-heaps,  village- 
sites,  mounds,  and  ruins  in  many  parts  of  North,  Central,  and  South 
America,  as  well  as  by  extensive  examinations  of  gravel  beds,  peat 
bogs,  and  river  and  other  deposits  of  various  geological  ages.  By 
the  arrangement  in  the  Museum  of  these  special  collections  in  their 
geographical  sequence,  each  tells  its  own  storj'  in  all  its  details. 

For  a  comparative  study  of  the  archaeology  and  ethnology  of  other 
parts  of  the  world  two  rooms  are  devoted  to  collections  arranged 
ethnographicall}'.  There  is  also  a  large  anthropological  collection, 
Including  over  two  thousand  human  crania  and  many  more  or  less 
complete  skeletons. 

The  Semitic  Museum,  founded  by  Mr.  Jacob  H.  Schiff  in  1889, 
occupies  temporary  quarters  in  the  new  part  of  the  Peabod}^  Museum. 
Its  aim  is  to  furnish  materials  for  illustration  of  the  Semitic  instruc- 
tion given  in  the  University  and  for  original  investigation,  and 
also  to  show  to  the  general  public  the  place  which  belongs  to  the 
Semites  in  the  history  of  culture.  The  collection  embraces  casts  of 
many  of  the  most  interesting  Semitic  monuments  in  the  British 
Museum,  the  Louvre,  and  the  Berlin  Museum.  Among  these  are 
Assyrian  bas-reliefs  from  Nineveh  and  Kalah  ;  Babylonian  statues 
from  Tello  ;  and  Phoenician,  Hebrew,  Moabite,  Arabic,  Punic,  Hittite, 
and  Persian  monuments,  bas-reliefs,  and  inscriptions.  It  contains 
also  manuscripts,  Arabic,  Hebrew,  and  Syriac,  and  a  large  number 
of  photographs  illustrating  ancient  and  modern  Semitic  life,  art,  and 
scenery.  There  are  many  original  clay  tablets  from  Bab3don,  some 
of  which  are  of  great  interest,  and  also  Semitic  coins  and  other 
objects  illustrating  the  life  of  the  people.  It  is  intended  to  make  the 
collection  as  complete  as  possible  in  material  from  Palestine  illus- 
trating Hebrew  history.    The  Museum  will  be  opened  in  April,  1891. 


44 


BOTANIC   GARDEN,   HERBARIA,  AND   ARBORETUM. 

The  Botanic  Garden  and  greenhouses  occupy  about  seven  acres 
of  land  opposite  the  Observatory  grounds.  About  6000  species  of 
flowering  plants  are  grown  for  educational  purposes,  supplying  stu- 
dents of  Botany  who  are  members  of  the  University  with  abundant 
material  for  determination  or  investigation.  The  Botanical  library 
of  9000  volumes  and  pamphlets  and  the  University  Herbarium  are 
contained  in  one  of  the  buildings  belonging  to  the  Garden.  •  The  Her- 
barium contains  several  hundred  thousand  specimens  which  are  open,, 
under  the  direction  of  the  Curator,  to  qualified  and  properly  registered 
students.  The  accessions  to  the  Herbarium  in  1889-90  illustrate  the 
direction  and  the  rapidity  of  its  growth.  The}'  included  850  speci- 
mens from  Northern  Mexico,  embracing  many  new  and  little-known 
species  ;  575  from  Canada  ;  600  from  Porto  Rico  ;  670  from  Bolivia  ? 
700  through  the  Director  of  the  Kew  Gardens^  mainly  from  China,. 
Tasmania,  and  Brazil;  126  from  Arabia  Felix;  300  from  South 
Africa ;  240  from  Australia ;  the  entire  Thomas  P.  James  collection 
of  mosses,  and  a  large  part  of  the  George  Thurber  collections. 

The  Herbarium  of  Cryptogamic  Botany  is  placed  in  the  University 
Museum  in  connection  with  the  Botanical  Museum.  It  contains  sev- 
eral hundred  thousand  specimens,  including  the  Tuckerman  collection 
of  lichens,  having  about  75,000  specimens  ;  the  Curtis  collection  of 
fungi,  about  equal  in  magnitude  ;  and  the  Farlow  collection  of  algae^ 
lichens,  and  fungi.  Competent  students  who  are  not  members  of  the 
University  may  obtain  permission  to  use  the  Herbarium  under  proper 
sui)er  vision. 

The  Arnold  Arboretum  occupies  a  portion  of  the  Bussey  Farm,. 
160  acres  in  extent,  in  that  part  of  Boston  known  as  West  Roxbury. 
It  was  founded  for  the  purpose  of  scientific  research  and  experiment 
in  Arboriculture,  Forestry,  and  Dendrology,  and  as  an  out-door 
museum  of  trees  and  shrubs  suited  to  the  climate  of  Massachusetts. 
Open  air  instruction  in  arboriculture  is  given  to  classes  during  a  part 
of  the  year.  The  living  collections  are  supplemented  by  others  in  the 
Herbarium  and  Museum  which  are  soon  to  be  placed  in  the  large 
building  to  be  erected  on  the  grounds  as  the  gift  of  Mr.  H.  HoUis 
Hunnewell.  Any  one  properly  qualified  to  pursue  the  study  of  prac- 
tical arboriculture  or  forestry  may  be  admitted  to  the  Arboretum  as  a 
student.  Details  are  obtainable  from  the  Director,  Professor  Charles 
S.  Sargent,  Brookline,  Mass. 


45 


THE  RELIGIOUS  EXERCISES  OF  THE  UNIVERSITY. 

Harvard  University  is  in  the  broadest  possible  sense  unsectarian. 
Its  officers,  graduates,  and  students  include  persons  of  every  shade 
of  belief.  All  its  religious  exercises  are  voluntary.  Compulsory 
attendance  at  morning  prayers  was  abolished  in  1886,  and  the 
effect  of  the  change  has  been  good.  The  regular  services  are  held 
on  Sunday  evenings,  every  week-day  morning  in  term-time  between 
the  breakfast  hour  and  the  beginning  of  lectures,  and  on  Thursday 
afternoons  during  the  winter.  These  services  are  conducted  by  the 
Plummer  Professor  of  Christian  Morals,  assisted  from  time  to  time 
by  five  Preachers  to  the  University  who  are  appointed  annually  by 
the  Governing  Boards.  These  preachers  have  included  Rt.  Rev. 
Phillips  Brooks,  D.D.,  Rev.  Edward  Everett  Hale,  D.D.,  Rev. 
Lyman  Abbott,  D.D.,  and  other  clergymen  of  conspicuous  ability. 
Every  day  during  term-time  the  Preacher  to  the  University  con- 
ducting services  for  the  time  being  receives,  at  stated  hours, 
members  of  the  University  who  desire  advice  or  aid.  The  many 
hours  occupied  by  these  interviews  are  counted  by  both  parties 
to  them  as  productive  of  great  and  lasting  good.  A  portion  of 
the  time  the  Sunday  evening  services  are  conducted  b}^  invited 
Clergymen  from  various  parts  of  the  country,  who  are  chosen  on 
account  of  their  recognized  leadership  in  their  localities  and  de- 
nominations. Among  those  holding  these  services  during  the  past 
few  years  have  been  the  Rev.  Dr.  McCosh  of  Princeton,  N.  J.,  Rev. 
Dr.  W.  R.  Huntington  of  New  York,  Rev.  Dr.  Hunger  of  New 
Haven,  Rt.  Rev.  H.  C.  Potter  of  New  York,  Rev.  Dr.  Fisher  of  New 
Haven,  Rev.  President  Hyde  of  Brunswick,  Rev.  Dr.  McVickar  of 
Philadelphia,  Rev.  Professor  Tucker  of  Andover,  Rt.  Rev.  T.  U. 
Dudley  of  Kentucky,  Rev.  President  Andrews  of  Providence,  Pro- 
fessor Henry  Drummond  of  Glasgow,  and  Mr.  Moody  the  evangelist. 

The  Preachers  to  the  University  publish  a  brief  pamphlet  describ- 
ing the  religious  work  of  the  year  which  may  be  obtained  on  applica- 
tion. It  bears  witness  to  the  fact  that  religious  life  in  the  University 
is  healthy  and  active. 

In  the  Harvard  Divinity  School  weekly  debates  and  conferences 
are  held  on  Wednesday  afternoons,  and  preaching  services  on  Friday 
evenings. 

During  the  last  academic  year  a  series  of  Tuesday  evening  Col- 
lege Conferences  on  the  literary,  ethical,  and  religious  aspects  of 
the  Bible  were  held.      Among   the   subjects   chosen   were    the    fol- 


46 

lowing:  "The  Literary  Aspect  of  the  English  Bible,"  Professor 
Kittredge  ;  "The  Bible  and  the  Sacred  Books  of  the  East,"  Pro- 
fessor Everett;  "The  Bible  in  its  relation  to  Modern  Problems," 
Rev.  L3'man  Abbott ;  "  The  Development  of  the  Hebrew  Religion,"" 
Professor  Toy. 

Among  the  subjects  of  the  Conferences  in  1888  and  1889  were  the 
following:  "College  Responsibility,"  Rev.  Phillips  Brooks,  D.D.  ; 
"College  Public  Opinion,"  President  Eliot;  "The  Recovery  of 
Religious  Enthusiasm,"  Rev.  Professor  Tucker  of  Andover ;  "The 
Belief  in  Immortality,'.'  Rev.  Professor  Everett;  "Public  Life," 
Hon.  Theo.  Roosevelt  of  New  York;  "Problems  of  Charity  in  a 
Large  City,"  A,  T.  White,  Esq.,  of  Brooklyn,  N.  Y.  ;  and  a  series 
of  addresses  on  "The  Choice  of  a  Profession"  by  eminent  members 
of  the  various  learned  professions. 

The  religious  societies  of  the  University  are  the  Harvard  Y.M.C. A. 
{formerly  known  as  the  Society  of  Christian  Brethren),  the  St. 
Paul's  Society,  the  Oxford  Club,  and  the  Harvard  Religious  Union. 
They  have  numerous  members.  Many  members  of  the  University 
engage  actively  in  charity  work  in  Boston  and  Cambridge,  fields  in 
which  ample  opportunity  is  offered  for  effort  of  this  kind. 

There  are  in  Cambridge  or  its  immediate  vicinity  theological  semi- 
naries of  at  least  five  of  the  leading  evangelical  denominations. 

In  addition  to  the  opportunities  for  voluntary  worship  in  the 
University  Chapel,  seats  are  provided  for  students,  at  the  expense  of 
the  College,  in  many  churches  of  different  denominations  situated 
near  the  College  buildings. 

The  following  extract  from  a  magazine  article  published  recently 
by  a  young  man  who  came  to  Harvard  from  another  college,  illustrates, 
student  opinion  of  the  moral  condition  of  the  University  :  "  It  is  only 
the  outgrowth  of  tendencies  planted  in  the  school  and  the  home.  If 
boys  come  from  sensible  homes  and  schools  to  Harvard,  they  will  find 
it  a  place  unexcelled  in  developing  influences  and  opportunities.  In 
every  case  the  choice  of  what  the  man  will  be  must  rest  with  the  man 
himself." 


47 


THE   LECTUKE-EOOMS   AND   THEIR  USES. 

All  the  Professional  Schools  of  the  University  have  separate 
buildings  devoted  exclusively  to  their  own  uses,  and  their  buildings 
have  ample  lecture-room  accommodations.  The  Lawrence  Scientific 
School  has  a  building  of  its  own  containing  19  lecture-rooms  and 
work  shops.  Its  students  also  work  much  of  their  time  in  the  labora- 
tories and  museums.  The  College  and  Graduate  School  together 
occupy  lecture-rooms  in  nine  buildings,  80  rooms  in  all  being  in 
constant  use.  A  few  of  these  rooms  seat  between  four  and  six 
hundred  students  at  once,  but  most  of  them  are  adapted  to  classes 
of  20,  40,  70,  or  125  each.  Small  classes  are  one  feature  of  the 
elective  system.  The  largest  of  the  lecture-halls  of  the  University 
is  Sanders  Theatre,  which  seats  1400  persons.  The  Commencement- 
Day  exercises  are  held  in  it,  as  well  as  many  evening  concerts, 
lectures,  and  readings. 

The  number  of  evening  lectures,  seminar}^  meetings,  conferences,, 
concerts,  and  readings  is  large,  students  often  having  their  choice, 
in  a  single  evening,  of  four  or  five  such  auxiliaries  to  regular  work. 
The  lecturers,  while  often  members  of  one  of  the  University  Facul- 
ties, are  quite  as  likely  to  be  distinguished  visitors  from  abroad  or 
from  some  other  centre  of  American  culture.  Most  of  the  speakers 
come  as  the  guests  of  student  societies  like  the  Classical  Club,  the 
Reform  Club,  the  Deutscher  Yerein,  or  the  Total  Abstinence 
League  ;  but  the  University  often  invites  eminent  scholars  to  deliver 
courses  of  public  lectures,  as  for  example,  Professor  Lanciani  in 
1886  and  Hon.  David  A.  Wells  in  1889.  A  series  of  eight  instru- 
mental concerts  is  given  each  winter,  in  Sanders  Theatre,  by  the 
Boston  Symphony  Orchestra.  The  best  music  is  performed  at  these 
concerts.  During  the  winter  of  1890-91  the  number  of  public  evening- 
lectures  and  similar  appointments  in  the  University  lecture-rooms 
was  over  a  hundred,  the  audiences  in  some  instances  exceeding  a 
thousand. 

Societies  like  the  Harvard  Union,  the  Republican  Club,  the  Pierian 
Sodality  and  Glee  Club,  the  Harvard  Y.  M.  C.  A.  and  others  which 
are  representative  of  student  activity  in  economic,  literary,  musical 
or  religious  ways  make  frequent  evening  use  of  the  lecture-rooms  at 
the  times  of  their  stated  meetings.  It  is  the  policy  of  the  University 
to  allow  the  free  use  of  its  rooms  by  student  societies  which  are 
not  simply  social  in  their  character,  or  unrepresentative  in  their 
membership. 


48 


THE   ATHLETIC   BUILDINGS   AND   FIELDS. 

The  University  has  four  buildings  devoted  wholly  to  athletic  pur- 
poses —  the  Hemenway  Gymnasium,  the  Carey  Athletic  Building, 
the  University  Boat  House,  and  the  Weld  Boat  House.  The  Hem- 
enway Gymnasium,  built  in  1879,  has  —  allowing  for  the  reasonable 
coming  and  going  of  individuals  —  accommodations  for  between  2000 
and  3000  students.  As  regards  size,  strength,  and  variety  of  its 
apparatus  and  completeness  of  its  appointments,  the  Gymnasium 
supplies  every  desire  of  the  indoor  athlete.  For  members  of  the 
University  and  class  crews,  nines  and  elevens,  the  Carey  Athletic 
Building,  having  a  floor  area  of  7848  square  feet,  gives  peculiar 
accommodations.  For  the  crews  there  is  a  tank  containing  a  fixed 
boat,  around  which  passes  a  current  of  water.  For  the  nines 
there  are  rooms  in  which  indoor  practice  in  pitching  and  batting  is 
made  easy.  Early  in  the  autumn  the  elevens  use  a  room  with  an 
earth  floor,  which  gives  opportunities  for  drill  in  dodging,  tackling, 
and  passing  the  ball.  The  same  room  is  available  for  practice  in 
jumping,  vaulting,  and  similar  exercises.  Of  the  two  boat-houses, 
the  University  is  for  the  regular  crews,  and  is  arranged  to  hold  their 
long  shells  used  in  races.  Its  floor  space  is  6893  square  feet.  The 
Weld  Boat  House  is  for  the  use  of  any  students  who  enjoy  rowing. 
It  contains  boats  of  various  kinds  sufficient  for  300  persons.  All 
students  using  the  athletic  buildings  are  closely  supervised  and 
allowed  to  take  only  proper  kinds  and  amounts  of  exercise.  The 
Director  of  the  Gymnasium  is  a  physician  and  an  expert  in  physical 
development.  The  outdoor  sports  of  the  students  requiring  fields 
for  play  are  accommodated  on  Jarvis  Field  (five  acres) ,  Holmes 
Field  (five  acres),  Norton  Field  (seven  acres),  and  the  Soldier's  Field 
(twenty-seven  acres).  The  latter  is  not  yet  in  use,  but  has  sufficient 
area  to  meet  the  demands  of  a  very  large  number  of  students.  The 
athletic  fields  now  in  use  have  stands  and  benches  erected  around 
them  sufficient  to  seat  about  6000  persons. 

The  Soldier's  Field  was  given  to  the  University  in  1890  by  Major 
Henry  L.  Higginson  of  Boston  in  memory  of  friends  who  served  in 
the  Civil  War.  In  time  it  will  become  the  principal  athletic  field  of 
the  students.  It  is  situated  on  the  south  side  of  the  Charles  River, 
opposite  Old  Cambridge,  and  adjoins  the  extensive  marshes  once 
owned  by  Mr.  Longfellow  and  given  by  him  to  the  University. 


49 


PRIZES. 

The  money  prizes  offered  annually  in  the  various  departments  of 
the  University  amount  to  $2755.     They  are  as  follows  :  — 

Nine  Bowdoin  prizes,  varying  from  $50  to  $100  each,  for  disserta- 
tions upon  announced  economic,  classical,  or  scientific  subjects,  or 
for  translations  of  set  passages  of  English  into  Latin  or  Greek  prose. 
These  are  open  whoUj^  or  in  part  to  students  in  the  Graduate  School, 
the  College,  the  Scientific  School,  and  other  parts  of  the  University. 

Five  Bo3^1ston  prizes,  three  of  $45  each  and  two  of  $60  each,  for 
excellence  in  elocution,  open  to  Seniors  and  Juniors  in  the  College. 

The  Sargent  prize  of  $100,  for  the  best  metrical  translation  of  an 
ode  of  Horace,  open  to  students  in  the  undergraduate  department. 

The  Sumner  prize  of  $100,  for  the  best  dissertation  on  a  subject 
connected  with  the  topic  of  Universal  Peace,  open  to  all  departments. 

The  Toppan  prize  of  $150,  for  the  best  essay  on  a  selected  subject 
in  Political  Science,  open  to  graduates  of  three  years'  standing  and 
to  students  in  the  Graduate  and  Professional  Schools. 

The  Chauncey  Wright  prize  of  $25,  for  the  best  mathematical  thesis 
on  an  announced  subject,  open  to  Juniors,  Seniors,  and  graduates. 

The  Dante  prize  of  SI 00,  for  the  best  essay  on  a  subject  drawn 
from  the  life  or  works  of  Dante,  open  to  students  in  any  department 
and  to  graduates  of  not  more  than  three  years'  standing. 

The  George  B.  Sohier  prize  of  $250,  for  the  best  thesis  presented 
by  an  approved  candidate  for  Honors  in  English  or  modern  literature. 

The  Paine  prizes,  two  of  $100  each,  for  the  best  essays  by  any 
students  of  the  University  on  the  ethical  aspect  of  social  questions ; 
for  example,  labor  problems,  productive  cooperation,  etc. 

The  Semitic  prizes,  two  of  $100  each,  open  to  students  in  the 
Semitic  Languages. 

The  Harvard  Law  School  Association  prize  of  $100,  for  the  best 
essay  upon  a  selected  subject  in  law,  open  to  third-year  students  in 
the  Law  School. 

The  Boylston  Medical  prizes,  two  prizes  of  one  or  two  hundred 
dollars  each,  upon  announced  subjects  in  medical  science,  open  to 
pubiic  competition. 

The  Porter  prize  of  $50,  for  the  best  dissection  deserving  the 
award  illustrative  of  surgical  anatomy,  open  to  members  of  the  Med- 
ical School  and  graduates  of  not  more  than  five  years'  standing. 

The  Otology  prize  of  $25,  for  the  best  preparation  illustrating  the 
osseous  anatomy  of  the  ear,  or  for  the  best  thesis  showing  original 
work  on  an  otological  subject,  open  to  third-year  students  in  the 
Medical  School. 


/)0 


CONCLUSION. 

This  brief  surve}^  has  shown  that  Harvard  University  with  its  large 
corps  of  instructors  ;  its  collections  of  books,  apparatus,  and  sci- 
entific material ;  its  activity  in  the  general  advancement  and  diffusion 
of  knowledge  ;  its  ability  and  readiness  to  aid  the  poor  but  promising 
student ;  its  hospitality  towards  all  scholars,  no  matter  what  their 
race  or  creed,  is  in  fact  a  true  University. 

Although  age  is  too  apt  to  breed  unwise  conservatism,  this  Univer- 
sity is  more  frequently  assailed  for  its  spirit  of  progress,  and  its 
willingness  to  break  with  precedent  for  the  sake  of  truth,  than  it  is 
for  its  attachment  to  venerable  tradition.  It  has  done  its  part  in 
making  the  degree  of  Bachelor  of  Arts  a  broader  and  a  higher 
title.  It  has  increased  the  significance  of  the  degrees  of  Master  of 
Arts  and  Doctor  of  Philosophy,  and  it  has  been  prudent  in  its 
bestowal  of  honorary  degrees.  Having  for  twenty  years  steadily 
increased  the  severity  of  its  requirements  for  admission  and  for 
graduation,  it  is  not  unwilling  to  permit  capable  students  to  compress 
somewhat  the  term  of  residence  ordinarily  required  for  the  degree  of 
Bachelor  of  Arts,  in  order  that  more  young  Americans  may  seek  the 
degree  of  Bachelor  of  Arts,  and  that  the  professional  degrees  and 
the  degrees  of  Master  of  Arts,  Doctor  of  Philosophy,  and  Doctor  of 
Science  may  be  taken  less  late  in  life  by  college  graduates.  Not  a 
few  who  are  able  to  meet  in  full  the  requirements  for  the  first  degree 
in  three  years  or  three  years  and  a  half  are  allowed  to  do  so.  All 
who  aim  to  become  teachers  are  encouraged  to  secure  either  the 
Master's  degree  or  the  degree  of  Doctor  of  Philosophy. 

In  1871  Harvard  University  included  1149  students  and  116  teach- 
ers. In  1892  it  includes  2658  students  and  253  teachers.  There 
is  reason  to  suppose  that  this  rate  of  increase  may  be  maintained. 
The  authorities  of  the  University  desire  it ;  the  alumni  are  believed 
to  be  ready  to  provide  such  additional  endowments  as  may  be  needed, 
and  the  public  is  alive  to  the  fact  that  more  is  to  be  gained  by  ex- 
panding an  existing  institution  of  merit  than  by  multiplying  poorly 
equipped  schools.  Harvard's  equipment  is  capable  of  serving  many 
more  advanced  students  than  now  use  it.  Such  students,  if  qualified 
for  advanced  work,  are  welcome  not  only  in  the  departments  of  Phi- 
lology, Literature,  Political  Science,  Mathematics,  and  Philosophy, 
but  also  in  the  scientific  work-shops  of  the  University  —  the  Observa- 
tory, the  Museums,  the  Herbaria,  and  the  experimental  rooms  of 
the  laboratories. 


51 


Table  of  Schools  and  Colleges  from  which  }■  oung  men  actually  entered 
Harvard  College  from  1881  to  1890  inclusive,  with  the  number 
that  entered  from  each  institution  in  each  year.  Special  students 
are  not  included.  An  asterisk  (*)  indicates  a  public  school,  a 
dagger  (t)  an  endowed  school. 


Acadia  College,  Wolfville,  Nova  Scotia  .  .  .  . 
fAdams  Academy,  Quincy 

Adelbert  College  of  W.  R.  Univ.,  Cleveland,  O.  . 

fAdelphi  Academy,  Brooklyn,  N.  Y 

fAlbany,  N.  Y.,  Academy 

*Albany,  N.Y.,  High  School 

Albion  College,  Mich 

Alfred,  N.  Y.,  University 

Amherst  College 

Andover  Theological  Seminary 

*Arlington,  Cotting  High  School 

Atlanta  University,  Georgia 

*Auburn,  Me.,  Edward  Little  High  School.    .    .    . 

*Auburn,  N.  Y.,  High  School 

*Augusta,  Me.,  Cony  High  School 

Augustana  College,  Rock  Island,  111 

fBarre  Academy 

Bauglier's  Academy,  Hanover,  Pa 

Belmont  School,  Belmont,  Cal 

Belmont  School,  Belmont,  Mass 

Berkeley  Gymnasium,  San  Francisco,  Cal.    .    .    . 

Berkeley  School,  Boston 

Berkeley  School,  New  York 

Berkeley  School,  Providence,  R.  I 

fBerwick  Academy,  Soutli  Berwick,  Me 

Bethany  College,  W.  Va 

Boston  College 

*Boston  English  High  School 

*Boston  Latin  School 

Boston  University 

Bowdoin  College,  Brunswick,  Me 

fBrackett  Academy,  Greenland,  N.  H 

*Bridgewater  High  School 

fBristol  Academy,  Taunton 

fBromfield  School,  Harvard 

*Brookfield  High  School 

*Brookline  High  School 

Brooklyn,  N.  Y.,  Latin  School 

Brown,  H.  II.,  Private  School,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 

Brown  University,  Providence,  R.  I 

Browne  &  Nichols,  Private  School,  Cambridge    . 

Bucknell  University,  Lewisburg,  Pa 

♦Buffalo,  N.  Y.,High  School 

Buffalo,  N.Y.,  Latin  School 

♦Buffalo,  N.  Y.,  State  Normal  School 

fBurr  &  Burton  Seminary,  Manchester,  Vt.  .  .  . 
♦Cambridge  Latin  School 


17 


11 


17 


19 


20 


11 


4 

17  25  31 

2    1 


14 


14 


52 


1 

1 

CO 

CO 
r-l 

00 

00 

CO 

28 

00 

i 

Carleton  College,  Northfield,  Minn 

*Castine   Me.,  High  School 

1 

1 

2 

2 
1 

I 

i 

; 

i 

2 

2 

1 
3 

i 

3 

i 

2 

2 

• 

1 
1 

2 
1 

1 

2 
1 

i 

2 
2 

1 
1 

1 

1 

2 
1 

2 

1 

2 

4 
1 

2 

1 

1 

1 
3 

1 
1 

1 

3 

7 
3 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 
1 

Centre  College,  Danville,  Ky 

Chadwick  &  Pye,  Boys'  Prep.  Sch. ,  Brooklyn,  N.  Y. 

Charleston,  S    C,  College  of 

Charlier  Institute,  New  York 

3 
3 
2 

Chase,  R.  H.,  Private  School,  Philadelphia,  Pa.  . 

Chauncy  Hall  School,  Boston 

*Chelsea  High  School ,    . 

♦Chicago,  111.,  High  School 

Christian  College,  Monmouth,  Ore 

♦Cincinnati,  0.,  Hughes  High  School 

♦Cincinnati,  0.,  Woodward  High  School     .    .    .    . 
Cleveland,  0.,  Academy 

♦Cleveland,  0.,  Central  High  School 

♦Cleveland,  0.,  West  High  School 

fColby  Academy,  New  London,  N.  H 

Colby  University,  Waterville,  Me 

College  of  the  City  of  New  York 

College  of  Emporia,  Kan 

College  of  New  Jersey,  Princeton,  N.  J 

fCoUegiate  andPolytech.  Institute,  Brooklyn,  N.  Y. 
Colorado  College,  Colorado  Springs,  Colo.     .    .    . 
Columbia  College,  New  York 

Columbia  College  School  of  Mines,  New  York     . 

Columbian  University,  Washington,  D.  C.     ... 

♦Concord  High  School 

• 
1 

• 

Cornell  College,  Mt.  Vernon,  Iowa 

Cornell  University,  Ithaca,  N.  Y 

fCorning,  N.  Y.,  Free  Academy 

fCushing  Academy,  Ashburnham 

Cutler,  A.  H.,  Private  School,  New  York     .    .    . 

Cutler,  Edward  H. ,  Private  School,  Newton     .    . 

Dalhousie  College,  Halifax,  N.  S 

Dartmouth  College,  Hanover,  N.  H 

Dearborn  Morgan  School,  Orange,  N.  J 

♦Decatur,  111.,  High  School 

Delaware  College,  Newark,  Del 

1 

i 

4 

1 

Denison  University,  Granville,  0 

♦Denver,  Colo.,  High  School 

fDerby  Academy,  Hingham 

Dickinson  College,  Carlisle,  Pa 

fDickinson  High  Sch.  &  Deerfield  Acad.,  Deerfield 
♦Dorchester  High  School 

Drury  College,  Springfield,  Mo 

fDummer  Academy,  South  Byfield •   . 

Dwight  School,  New  York 

fEast  Maine  Conference  Seminary,  Bucksport,  Me. 

Eayrs,  Wm.  N.,  Private  School,  B'oston    .... 

♦Elkhart,  Ind.,  High  School 

♦Ellsworth,  Me.,  High  School 

Emerson  Institute,  Washington,  D.  C 

Eminence  College,  Ky 

Episcopal  Theological  School  at  Cambridge      .    . 
fEton  College,  England 

Eureka  College,  Eureka,  111 

♦Everett  High  School 

Everson,  D.  S.,  Collegiate  School,  New  York 

53 


1 

i 

1 

CO 

'i 

«3 
00 

1*4 

3 

1 

• 

2 
19 

1 
1 

i 

GO 

i 
1 

25 

19 

oo 

1 
1 

11 
1 
1 

3 

1 

15 

1 

3 
1 
1 

1 
1 

9 
2 

1 

1 

1 

5 

1 

1 

1 

3 

1 

5 

1 

17 
2 

1 

1 
2 

15 

1 
2 

1 
2 

1 

♦Fall  River,  B.  M.  C.  Durfee  High  School     .    .    . 

Fish,  C.  E.,  Private  School,  Worcester 

Fisk  University,  Nashville,  Tenn 

♦Fitchburg  High  School 

• 

2 

Fort  Hill  School,  Rochester,  N.  Y 

*Fort  Wayne,  Ind.,  Central  Grammar  School    .    . 
*Framingham  High  School 

Frankfurt  Gymnasium,  Germany 

Franklin  and  Marshall  College,  Lancaster,  Pa.     . 

fFriends'  Academy,  New  Bedford 

♦Gardner  High  School 

Georgetown  College,  D.  C 

i 

1 
1 

2 

Gibbens  and  Beach,  Private  School,  New  York    . 

2 
2 

2 

Goff,  C.  B.,  Engl.  &  Class.  Sch.,  Providence,  R.  I. 

Griswold  College,  Davenport,  Iowa 

Groton  School,  Groton 

Grove  City  College,  Pa 

Gunnery  School,  Washington,  Conn 

Hale,  Albert,  Private  School,  Boston 

Hamilton  College,  Clinton,  N.  Y 

I    Hamline  University,  St.  Paul,  Minn 

Hanover  College,  Ind 

fHarrow,  England 

fHarry  Hillman  Academy,  Wilkes-Barre,  Pa.     .    . 
♦Hartford,  Conn.,  High  School 

1 

9 
1 

1 

2 
1 

i 

2 
18 

2 

10 

Harvard  Graduate  Student 

Harvard  College  Special  Student 

Harvard  Divinity  School 

Harvard  Medical  School,  Boston 

Harvard  School,  Chicago,  111 

Harvard  Veterinary  School,  Boston 

Haverford  College,  Pa 

♦Haverhill  High  School 

2 
2 

Hill  School,  Pottstown,  Pa 

♦Hingham  High  School 

Hobart  College,  Geneva,  N.  Y 

Holbrook's  Military  School,  Sing  Sing,  N.  Y.  .    . 
Hopkinson,  John  P.,  Private  School,  Boston    .    . 

Howard  College,  Marion,  Ala 

Howard  University,  Washington,  D.  C 

♦Hyde  Park  High  School 

14 

♦Hyde  Park,  111. ,  High  School 

Illinois  State  Normal  University,  Normal,  111.     . 

Indianapolis,  Ind.,  Classical  School 

♦Indianapolis,  Ind.,  High  School 

♦Indiana  State  Normal  School,  Indiana,  Pa.   .    .    . 

Indiana  University,  Bloomington,  Ind 

Iowa  College,  Grinnell,  loAva 

fives  Seminary,  Antwerp,  N.  Y 

Jarvis  Hall,  Denver,  Colo 

Johns  Hopkins  University,  Baltimore,  Md.   .    .    . 

♦Kansas  City,  Mo.,  High  School    . 

Kendall,  Joshua,  Private  School,  Cambridge    .    . 
Kentucky  Wesley  an  College,  Millersburg,  Ky.     . 

Kenyon  College,  Gambler,  0 

Keystone  Academy,  Factoryville,  Pa 

King's  School,  Stamford,  Conn 

1 

2 

54 


b-      OO      0>    O 


Knox  College,  Galesburg,  111 

Lafayette  College,  Easton,  Pa 

♦Lancaster  High  School 

fLawrence  Academy,  Groton 

♦Lawrence  High  School 

Lawrence  Scientific  School,  Cambridge     .... 

Lawrence  University,  Appleton,  Wis 

fLawrenceville  School,  N.  J 

♦Leominster,  Field  High  School 

LeRoy,  N.  Y.,  Academy 

♦Lexington  High  School 

♦Louisville,  Ky.,  Male  High  School 

♦Lowell  High  School 

♦Lynn  High  School 

fMcCollom  Institute,  Mt.  Vernon,  N.  H 

Madison  University,  Hamilton,  N.  Y 

♦Maiden  High  School 

Marietta  College,  Ohio 

Mass.  Institute  of  Technology,  Boston 

Milwaukee,  Wis.,  Academy 

♦Marlboro'  High  School 

Marlborough  St.  School,  Boston 

Marston's  University  School,  Baltimore,  Md.   .    . 

Maupin's  University  School,  Ellicott  City,  Md.    . 

♦Medford  High  School 

♦Melrose  High  School 

♦Merrimac  High  School 

♦Methuen  High  School 

♦Michigan  State  Normal  School,  Ypsilanti  .... 

Middlebury  College,  Vt 

♦Milford  High  School 

♦Milwaukee,  Wis.,  High  School 

Monmouth  College,  111 

♦Montclair,  N.  J.,  High  School 

♦Montpelier,  Vt.,  High  School 

Morse,  J.  H.,  Private  School,  New  York  .... 

Mt.  Allison  College,  Sackville,  N.  B 

Mt.  Pleasant  Military  Academy,  Sing  Sing,  N.  Y. 

Nashville,  Tenn.,  State  Normal  College     .    .    .    . 

♦Natick  High  School 

♦Needham  High  School 

♦Newark,  N.  J. ,  High  School 

♦Newburyport,  Brown  High  and  Putnam  Schools  . 

fNew  Church  School,  Waltham 

♦Newport,  P.  I.,  Rogers  High  School 

♦Newton  High  School 

Newton,  N.  J.,  Collegiate  Institute 

New  York  School  of  Languages 

fNichols  Academy,  Dudley 

Nichols,  Wm.,  Private  School,  Boston 

Noble,  G.  W.  C,  Private  School,  Boston  .... 

♦Nortliampton  High  School 

♦North  Attleboro'  High  School 

Northwestern  University,  Evanston,  111 

Oberlin  College,  Ohio 

Ohio  Wesleyan  University,  Delaware,  O 

♦Omaha,  Neb.,  High  School 

Park  Institute,  Rye,  N.  Y 


55 


*Pawtucket,  R.  I.,  High  School , 

Peekskill,  N.  Y.,  Military  Academy    .    .    .    .    , 

Pennsylvania  College,  Gettysburg,  Pa.    ... 

♦Philadelphia,  Penn.,  High  School 

fPhillips  Academy,  Andover 

fPhillips  Academy,  Exeter,  N.  H 

Pierce  Christian  College,  College  City,  Cal.  . 

Pine  Hill  Theological  College,  Halifax,  N.  S. 

fPinkerton  Academy,  Derry,  N.  H 

*Pittsburg,  Pa.,  Central  High  School    .... 

♦Portland,  Me.,  High  School 

♦Portsmouth,  N.  H.,  High  School 

Proctor  Academy,  Andover,  N.  H 

Pro-Gymnasium,  Germany 

♦Providence,  R.  I.,  High  School 

Ripon  College,  Wis •     .    . 

Riverview  Academy,  Poughkeepsie,  N.  Y.     . 
fRochester,  N.  Y.,  Free  Academy 

Rochester,  N.  Y.,  Theological  Seminary   .    . 

♦Romeo,  Mich.,  High  School 

fRoxbury  Latin  School 

Rugby  Academy,  Philadelphia,  Pa 

Sachs'  Collegiate  Institute,  New  York    ... 
fSt.  Johnsbury,  Vt. ,  Academy 

St.  John's  College,  Fordham,  N.  Y 

St.  John's  School,  Manlius,  N.  Y 

fSt.  John's  School,  Presque  Isle,  Me 

St.  John's  School,  Sing  Sing,  N.  Y 

St.  Lawrence  University,  Canton,  N.  Y,     .    . 

fSt.  Mark's  School,  Southboro' 

♦St.  Paul,  Minn.,  High  School 

fSt.  Paul's  School,  Concord,  N.  H 

St.  Stephen's  College,  Annandale,  N.  Y.    .    . 

♦Salem  High  School 

♦San  Francisco,  Cal.,  Boys'  High  School    .    . 

School  of  the  Lackawanna^  Scranton,  Pa.     . 

Shortlidge's  Media  Academy,  Pa 

Skaneateles,  N.  Y.,  Union  School   .    .    •  .    . 

Smith  Academy,  St.  Louis,  Mo , 

♦Somerville  High  School 

Southwestern  Presb.  Univ.,  Clarksville,  Tenn. 

♦Springfield  High  School 

♦Springfield,  111.,  High  School 

Spring  Hill  College,  near  Mobile,  Ala.  .    .    .    . 

State  College  of  Kentucky,  Lexington,  Ky.  .    . 

State  University  of  Iowa,  Iowa  City   .    .    .    .    , 

Stewart  Academy,  Reading,  Pa 

Swarthmore  College,  Pa , 

♦Syracuse,  N.  Y.,  High  School , 

Syracuse  University,  N.  Y , 

Tabor  Academy,  Marion , 

♦Taunton  High  School , 

fThayer  Academy,  South  Braintree  ..,.., 

Trinity  College,  Hartford,  Conn , 

Trinity  School,  Tivoli,  N.  Y 

♦Troy,  N.Y.,  High  School 

Tufts  College,  College  Hill 

fUnion  Academy,  Belleville,  N.  Y , 


19 


29 


14 


19 


56 


1 

i 

i 

1 

i 

g 

oo 

SB 

00 

00 

I— I 

1 

XJniversite  de  France 

1 

• 

1 

1 

1 

2 

1 
2 

1 
1 

i 

i 

4 

1 

. 
1 

. 

i 

37 

i 

3 

i 

2 

1 

2 

2 

2 

i 

30 

2 

i 

1 

i 

1 

3 
1 
4 

1 
2 

36 

2 

t '. 

2 
2 

1 

i 

1 

2 

2 

i 

33 

1 

1 

i 

1 

1 

1 
1 

3 

1 

3 
1 

2 

i 
1 

31 

2 

1 

1 

1 
2 

1 

2 
1 

1 
1 

1 
3 

33 

1 
1 
2 

1 

3 
2 

1 

2 

1 
2 

1 

1 

2 

1 
1 

2 

3 
3 
1 

2 
4 
1 
2 

54 

University  Grammar  School,  Providence,  R.  I.   . 

University  of  Alabama,  Ala 

University  of  California,  Berkeley,  Cal 

University  of  Cincinnati    0 

University  of  the  City  of  New  York 

University  of  Des  Moines,  Iowa 

1 
1 

University  of  Georgia,  Athens,  Ga 

University  of  Illinois,  Champaign,  111 

University  of  Kansas,  Lawrence,  Kan.  ..... 

University  of  Michigan,  Ann  Arbor,  Mich.  .    .    . 

University  of  New  Brunswick,  Fredericton,  N.  B. 

University  of  Oregon,  Eugene  City,  Ore 

University  of  Pennsylvania,  Philadelphia,  Pa.     . 
University  of  Rochester,  N.  Y 

University  of  State  of  Missouri,  Columbia,  Mo. 
University  of  Tennessee,  Knoxville,  Tenn.  .    .    . 

University  of  Vermont,  Burlington,  Vt 

University  of  Virginia,  Va 

University  of  Wisconsin,  Madison,  Wis 

University  of  Wooster,  0 

University  School,  Chicago,  111 

University  School,  Petersburg,  Va 

University  School,  San  Francisco,  Cal 

Urban  School,  San  Francisco,  Cal 

Utica,  N.  Y.,  Academy 

Vanderbilt  University,  Nashville,  Tenn 

fVermont  Academy,  Saxton's  River,  Vt 

fVermont  Episcopal  Institute,  Burlington,  Vt.  .    . 

*Wakefield  High  School 

*Waltham  High  School 

Warsaw,  N.Y.,  Union  School 

Washburn  College,  Topeka,  Kan 

*Washington,  D.  C,  High  School 

*Washington  Co.,  Vt.,  Grammar  Sch.,  Montpelier 

Washington  University,  St.  Louis,  Mo 

*Watertown  High  School 

*Wellesley  High  School 

Wesleyan  University,  Middletown,  Conn.     .    .    . 

fWestern  Reserve  Academy,  Hudson,  0 

*Westfield  High  School 

2 

i 

3 

• 
1 

'1 

2 

3G 

West  Newton  English  and  Classical  School  .    .    . 

White  &  Sykes,  Franklin  School,  Cincinnati,  0.  . 

William  Jewell  College,  Liberty,  Mo 

fWilliam  Penn  Charter  School,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 

Williams  College,  Williamstown 

fWilliston  Seminary,  East  Hampton 

Wilson  and  Kellogg,  Private  School,  New  York  . 

♦Winchester  High  School 

*Winsted,  Conn.,  High  School 

*Woburn  High  School 

*Woonsocket,  R.  I.,  High  School 

t Worcester  Academy 

3 

1 

1 
1 
1 

2 

48 

♦Worcester  High  School 

tWorcester  Polytechnic  Institute 

Yale  College,  New  Haven,  Conn 

Private  Pupils 

PAMPHLETS   ISSUED   BY   HARVAED   UNIVERSITY   FOR    GENERAL 
EREE   DISTRIBUTION.* 

Harvard  University.  A  brief  statement  of  what  Harvard  University  is,  .how  it 
may  be  entered,  and  how  its  degrees  may  be  obtained. 

Announcement  of  the  Courses  of  Instruction  provided  by  the  Faculty  of  Arts  and 
Sciences  (Graduate  School,  College,  Scientific  School). 

Annual  Announcement  of  the  Graduate  School. 

Selected  Sheets  from  the  University  Catalogue  containing  all  necessary  informa- 
tion for  persons  intending  to  enter  Harvard  College. 

Faculty  of  Arts  and  Sciences,  Regulations  for  Harvard  College. 

Information  for  Special  Students  in  Harvard  College. 

Annual  Announcement  of  the  Lawrence  Scientific  School. 

Annual  Announcement  of  the  Divinity  School. 

Annual  Announcement  of  the  Law  School. 

Annual  Announcement  of  the  Medical  School. 

Annual  Announcement  of  the  Dental  School. 

Annual  Announcement  of  the  School  of  Veterinary  Medicine. 

Annual  Announcement  of  the  Bussey  Institution,  a  School  of  Agriculture  and 
Horticulture. 

Circulars  describing  each  of  the  Summer  Courses  of  Instruction  (Chemistry, 
Physics,  Geology,  Botany,  Field  Engineering,  Anglo-Saxon,  English,  Ger- 
man, French,  Physiology  and  Hygiene,  Physical  Training). 

Opportunities  provided  for  Religious  Worship,  Instruction,  and  Fellowship. 

Programme  of  the  Semitic  Department, 

Programme  of  the  Departments  of  Classical  Philology  and  Sanskrit. 

Programme  of  the  Department  of  English. 

Programme  of  the  Department  of  German. 

Programme  of  the  Department  of  French. 

Description  of  the  Courses  of  Instruction  in  Italian,  Spanish,  and  Romance  Phi- 
lology. 

Programme  of  the  Department  of  Philosophy, 

Programme  of  the  Department  of  Political  Economy. 

Programme  of  the  Department  of  History. 

Programme  of  the  Department  of  Music. 

Programme  of  the  Department  of  Mathematics. 

Programme  of  the  Department  of  Physics. 

Programme  of  the  Department  of  Chemistry. 

Programme  of  the  Department  of  Zoology. 

Programme  of  the  Department  of  Geology. 

Programme  of  the  Courses  of  Instruction  for  Teachers. 

College  Expenses  at  Harvard. 

Harvard  University  Aid  Funds. 

Table  of  Schools  and  Colleges  from  which  young  men  have  actually  entered  Har- 
vard College  from  1881  to  1890  inclusive,  with  the  number  that  entered 
from  each  institution  in  each  year. 

Papers  used  at  the  Admission  Examinations  for  Harvard  College. 

Announcement  of  the  Canadian  Club  of  Harvard  University. 

Report  upon  Athletics,  with  Statistics. 

List  of  the  Serial  Publications  of  the  University. 

*  The  Annual  Catalogue  of  the  University  and  the  Reports  of  the  President  and  Treasurer  of 
the  University  ai-e  issued  gratuitously  upon  application,  to  any  alumnus,  officer  of  a  college  or 
school,  library,  or  public  journal.  The  Annual  Catalogue  may  be  obtained  (price,  60  cents)  oa 
application  to  the  University  Bookstore,  Cambridge,  Mass.  A 


PUBLICATIONS   OF   HARVARD   UNIVERSITY. 


Harvard  University  Catalogue.     12°.     .85. 

Contains  over  400  pages,  giving  detailed  information  concerning  all  departments  of  the  Uni- 
versity. Portions  of  the  Catalogue  giving  necessary  information  regarding  the  various  depart- 
ments are  also  issued  separately  for  free  distribution." 

Harvard  University  Calendar.     ^1.00. 

Contains  announcements  of  lectures  and  exercises  which  are  open  to  the  public.  It  appears 
vveekly  from  October  to  June. 

Harvard  University  Bulletin.     $1.00. 

Contains  extracts  from  the  records  of  the  governing  bodies  of  the  University,  necrologj'  of 
graduates,  accessions  to  the  University  Libiaries,  withspecial  bibliographies  and  articles  of  a 
bibliographical  nature.     It  appears  in  October,  January,  May. 

Annual  Reports  of  the  President  and  Treasurer  of  Harvard  College.     8" 

This  volume  contains  also  the  reports  from  the  various  departments  and  estabiisliments  of  the 
University.  The  Report  of  the  Treasurer  and  those  of  several  of  the  departments  are  also  issued 
separately. 

Bibliographical  Contributions. 

In  part  republished  from  the  Bulletin.  The  numbers  appear  at  irregular  intervals,  averaging 
from  three  to  six  annually. 

Harvard  University  Examination  Papers.     8°. 

Separate  parts  containing  papers  used  at  the  final  examinations  in  Hax'vard  College,  the 
admission  examinations  for  Harvard  College,  the  Law  School,  Medical  School,  etc. 

Annals  of  the  Observatory  of  Harvard  College.     4°. 

Seven  parts,  aggregating  nearly  600  pages,  appeared  in  1889-90.  The  records  thus  published 
include  both  Astronomical  and  Meteorological  observations. 

Memoirs  of  the  Museum  of  Comparative  Zoology  at  Harvard  College.     4°. 

Bulletin  of  the  Museum  of  Comparative  Zoology  at  Harvard  College.     8° 

Archaeological  and  Ethnological  Papers   of  the  Peabody  Museum  at  Harvard 
College. 
These  papers  will  appear  at  irregular  intervals,  but  will  be  paged  continuously. 

Note.  —  The  "  Proceedings  "  of  the  American  Academy  of  Arts  and  Sciences 
is  the  chief  vehicle  for  the  contributions  of  the  Chemical,  Physical,  and  Botanical 
Departments  of  the  University,  which  often  occupy  the  greater  number  of  its 
pages.  The  Medical  Department  issues  occasionally  a  volume  of  papers  for 
limited  circulation. 


The  Quarterly  Journal  of  Economics.     Boston  :  Geo.  H.  Ellis.     New  York  and 

London  :  Macmillan  &  Co.     8°.     $2.00. 

Besides  original  papers  in  Economic  Ilistoiy,  Criticism,  etc.,  each  number  contains  Corre- 
spondence, Reviews,  and  a  Bibliography  of  Economics,  including  articles  in  periodicals. 
Appears  October,  January,  April,  July. 

Harvard  Studies  in  Classical  Philology.     Boston.     Ginn  &  Co.     8°.     fl.OO. 

A  volume  of  about  200  pages  will  be  issued  yearly.    The  first  appeared  in  Januar}--,  1890, 
Harvard  Historical  Monographs.     Boston.     Ginn  &  Co.     8°. 

The  m  )nographs  will  appear  at  irregular  intervals.  No.  1 :  "  A  History  of  the  Veto  Power," 
by  Edvv.  C'.  Mason,  Instructor  in  Political  Economy,  $1.00,  and  No.  2:  "An  Introduction  to  the 
Study  of  I'ederal  Government,"  by  Albert  Bushnell  Hart,  Asst.  Professsor  of  History,  $1.00, 
have  appe  ired. 

Harvard  Law  Keview.     A  monthly  journal  of  law  published  by  Harvard  Law 
Students.     Cambridge.     Harvard  Law  IReview  Publishing  Association. 
12.50. 
Contains  papers  dealing  with  the  various  branches  and  aspects  of  the  law,  notes  of  important 

decisions  in  the  courts  of  this  country  and  of  England,  reviews,  summaries  of  law  periodicals,  etc. 

A  volume  comprises  ciglit  numbers,  appearing  from  October  to  Marcli. 

***  The  price  stated  is  for  a  complete  volume,  or  a  subscription  for  the  College  year;  when 
Tirice  is  given  the  publication  is,  in  general,  sold  m  separate  parts,  and  at  a  price  varying 
Mng  to  the  number  of  pages  and  of  illustrations  in  each  part. 


